Entity Properties and Parameters 7 1 5

Fiber Service Platform 3000R7
(FSP 3000R7)
Entity Properties and

Parameters
Document Version 7.1.5 (June 2007)
Product Release 7.1.5
EPP_Manual_Cover.fm
Copyright © 2001-2007 ADVA AG Optical Networking. All rights reserved.
All rights reserved. Hardware and software mentioned in this document includes software developed by
ADVA AG Optical Networking ("ADVA"), the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org), Teodor
Danciu (http://jasperreports.sourceforge.net), and/or other open source software. Some software was cre-
ated using ORBacus for Java by Object-Oriented Concepts, Inc.
Trademarks
The terms ADVA and FSP 3000R7 are trademarks or registered trademarks of ADVA in the United States,
Germany and/or other countries. All other company, product, or service mentioned in this document may
be trademarks or service marks of ADVA or their respective owner.
Patents
The content described in this document may be covered by patents or pending patent applications of AD-
VA. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents or future patents.
Disclaimers
The content of this document could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors, and is subject
to change at any time without prior notice. Reliance on this content is at the relying party's sole risk and
shall not create any liability or obligation for ADVA. Any references in this document to non-ADVA publi-
cations and/or non-ADVA Internet sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve
as an endorsement of those publications and/or Internet sites. The materials within those publications
and/or Internet sites are not part of the materials for any ADVA information, product or service, and use
of those publications and/or Internet sites is at your own risk.
THE CONTENT OF THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, IN-
CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PAR-
TICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL ADVA, ITS AFFILIATES, EMPLOYEES, OFFICERS OR
ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUEN-
TIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE. THE SAME APPLIES FOR ANY HARDWARE OR SOFTWARE COVERED BY THIS DOCUMENT, UNLESS A
SIGNED AGREEMENT WITH ADVA OR THE APPLICABLE PRODUCT LIABILITY LAW EXPRESSLY STATES OTHER-
WISE.
ADVA AG Optical Networking

Headquarters
Campus Martinsried
Fraunhoferstr. 9 A
82152 Martinsried/Muenchen
Germany
Phone: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 0
EPP_Manual_Cover.fm
Fax: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 199

info@advaoptical.com
ii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Table of Contents
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Purpose and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi
Document Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
Safety Symbols and Message Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
Obtaining Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xv
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Obtaining Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvi
Contact ADVA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii
Document Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Chapter 1 General Provisioning Behavior

1.1 Equipment Level Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.2 Facility/Equipment Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.3 Protection Group/Facility Dependence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.4 Dual-Card Protection Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.5 System Initiated Automatic Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.6 Shelf De-commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.7 Plug Related MEA Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
1.8 Shelf and Module Related MEA Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
1.9 Filter Module Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
1.9.1 Filter Combinations in Point-to-point Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
1.9.2 Filter Combinations in Ring Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Chapter 2 Provisioning Pluggable Modules

2.1 SFP-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
2.2 SFP-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
2.3 SFP-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
2.4 SFP-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.5 XFP-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
EntityProperties_ParametersTOC.fm
Chapter 3 Filter Modules

3.1 1CSMU-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.1.1 Equipment Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters Document Version 7.1.5 iii
Table of Contents
3.2 1CSMU-G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.2.1 Equipment Provisioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.3 1CSMU-EW-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
3.4 1CSMU-EW-D. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
3.5 1GSMU-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3.6 2ABSM-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
3.7 2BSM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
3.8 2CLSM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
3.9 3BSM-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
3.10 40CSM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.10.1 Equipment Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
3.11 4CSM-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.12 4CSM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.13 4CSMU-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3.14 4GSM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
3.15 8CSMU-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
3.16 8GSM-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
3.17 OSFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
3.18 PSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Chapter 4 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S
4.1 Equipment Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.1.1 Module Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
4.1.2 Plug Attributes - 2TCA2G5 Network Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.1.3 Plug Attributes - 2TCA2G5S Network Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
4.1.4 Plug Attributes - Client Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
4.2 2TCA2G5 Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
4.3 2TCA2G5S Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
4.4 Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
4.4.1 Network Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
4.4.2 Network EOC Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

4.4.3 Client Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
4.5 Network Protected Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
4.5.2 Network EOC Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
4.5.3 Network Protection Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
iv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Table of Contents
Chapter 5 2TCM2G5
5.1 Equipment Provisioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
5.1.1 Module Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5.1.2 Plug Attributes - Network Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.1.3 Plug Attributes - Client Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
5.2 2TCM2G5 Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
5.3 Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
5.3.1 Network Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
5.3.2 Client Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
5.4 Network Protected Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
5.4.2 Network Protection Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Chapter 6 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D
6.2 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
6.3 Multiplexer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Chapter 7 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D
7.2 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
7.3 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
7.4 Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
7.4.1 F4250/F2125 Facility Pair Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7.4.2 F1062 Facility Pair Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
7.5 Uni-directional Regenerator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Chapter 8 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D
8.2 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
8.3 Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
8.3.2 Network DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
8.3.3 ODU1 Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
8.3.5 Client DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

8.4 Dual Card Network Protected Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration. . . . . . . . . . .226
8.4.2 Network DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
8.4.3 ODU1 Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Document Version 7.1.5 v

Table of Contents

8.4.5 Client DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Chapter 9 4TCC2G5
9.1 Equipment Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.1.1 Module Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
9.1.2 Plug Attributes - Network Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
9.1.3 Plug Attributes - Client Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
9.2 4TCC2G5 Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
9.3 Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
9.3.2 Network DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
9.3.3 Path Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
9.3.4 GFP Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
9.4 Network Protected Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
9.4.2 Network DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
9.4.3 Path Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
9.4.4 GFP Facility Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
9.5 Dual Uni-directional Regenerator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Chapter 10 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D
10.1 Equipment Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
10.1.1 Module Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
10.1.2 Plug Attributes - Client Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
10.2 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
10.3 8-port Time Division Multiplexer Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
10.3.1 Network Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
10.3.2 Client Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
Chapter 11 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D
11.2 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
11.3 8-port ESCON Time Division Multiplexer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Chapter 12 Dispersion Compensation Modules

12.1 DCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
12.1.1 Equipment Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
12.2 DCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

vi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Table of Contents
Chapter 13 Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifiers

13.1 EDFA-DGC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
13.1.1 Equipment Provisioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
13.1.2 EDFA-DGC Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
13.1.3 In-Line Optical Amplifier Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
13.2 EDFA-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
13.2.2 EDFA-S Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
13.3 EDFA-SGC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
13.3.2 EDFA-SGC Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Chapter 14 FCU7HU
14.1 Equipment Provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
14.1.1 Module Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Chapter 15 NCU/NCU2E
15.2 NCU Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
15.3 NCU2E Supported Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
15.4 NCU/NCU2E Facility Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
15.4.1 NCU/NCU2E Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Chapter 16 OSCM/2OSCM
16.2 2OSCM Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
16.3 OSCM Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
16.4 OSCM/2OSCM Facility Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
16.4.1 Network Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Chapter 17 Protection Modules

17.1 1PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
17.2 2PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
Chapter 18 Power Supply Units

18.1 PSU7HU-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

18.2 PSU7HU-DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
Document Version 7.1.5 vii

Table of Contents
Chapter 19 Switch Modules

19.1 RSM-OLM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
19.1.2 RSM-OLM Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
19.1.3 Optical Line Protection Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
19.2 RSM-SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
19.2.2 RSM-SF Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
19.3 VSM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
19.3.2 VSM Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Chapter 20 SCUs
20.1 SCU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
20.1.2 SCU Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
20.1.3 SCU Facility Configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
20.2 SCU-E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
20.2.2 SCU-E Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
20.2.3 SCU-E Facility Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Chapter 21 Shelves
21.1 SH1HU-DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
21.2 SH7HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Chapter 22 WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D
22.2 WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
22.3 Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
22.4 Uni-directional Regenerator Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Chapter 23 WCA2G5
23.1.2 Plug Attributes - Network Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

23.2 WCA2G5 Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
viii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Table of Contents

23.4 Network Protected Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463
23.4.2 Network Protection Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
23.5 Bi-Directional Regenerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
Chapter 24 WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D
24.1.2 Plug Attributes - Client Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
24.2 WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
24.3 Data Services Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
24.4 10GBE OTN Adaptation Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
24.4.1 OTU2LAN Network Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
24.4.2 Network DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
24.5 Transport Services Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
24.5.1 Network Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
24.5.3 DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
24.6 Transport Services OTN Adaptation Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511
24.7 OTN Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
24.8 Dual Card Network Protected Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
24.8.3 Network Protection Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Chapter 25 WCC2G7-1N/WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D
25.1.2 Plug Attributes - Network Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
25.1.3 Plug Attributes - Client Side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
25.2 WCC2G7-1N/WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .530
25.3 SONET/SDH Transponder Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
25.4 OTN Adaptation Transponder Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
25.4.1 Network Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
25.4.2 Network DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
25.4.4 Client DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
25.5 OTN Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
25.5.1 Client and Network Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

25.6 1GBE Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
25.6.1 Client and Network Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
25.7 Dual Card Network Protected Transponder Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585
Document Version 7.1.5 ix

Table of Contents

25.7.3 Network Protection Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .592
Chapter 26 WCELS-C/WCELS-D
26.2 WCELS-C/WCELS-D Supported Facilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
26.3.1 Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
x FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Preface
The Preface gives general information for the effective use of the Fiber
Service Platform 3000R7 (FSP 3000R7) Entity Properties and Parameters.
This publication is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty
for accuracy and completeness.
Purpose and Scope

The purpose of this documentation is to provide reference information
about all provisioning, configuration and performance monitoring param-
eters for the FSP 3000R7 modules, as well as conditions for them.
This reference information is meant to be used in conjunction with the
User Guide, the Detailed Procedures or the Element Manager User Manual.
For any procedure in these documents where you are instructed to specify
a parameter, or read a parameter value, this document shows descriptions
of parameters, as well as default values and allowed range of entry.
Audience
The Entity Properties and Parameters is intended for qualified and trained
personnel who are involved in configuring, monitoring, maintaining or
troubleshooting the FSP 3000R7 equipment.
It assumes that personnel responsible for configuring and monitoring the
system are trained and have skills for this purpose. Lack of such skills re-
quires planning, and support of the personnel involved.
It is assumed that personnel responsible for general maintenance and
troubleshooting have the training required in electronic equipment main-
tenance.
It assumes that personnel responsible for optical maintenance and trou-
bleshooting have training in laser-based technology.
Organization
This documentation is organized as follows:
“Preface”
EPP_Preface.fm
FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters Document Version 7.1.5 xi
Entity Properties and Parameters
Describes the purpose, audience, organization and the conventions, that

are used throughout this documentation. It lists related documentation
that are referenced in this guide, and other resources that you can use to
learn more about FSP 3000R7.
“Document Revision History”
Chapter 1 “General Provisioning Behavior”
This chapter contains information on provisioning related behavior which

is generally applicable, and is therefore not repeated in the various
detailed sections within this document. Should any specific exceptions
exist, they will be clearly identified in the relevant detailed section.
Chapter 2 “Provisioning Pluggable Modules”
through
Chapter 26 “WCELS-C/WCELS-D”
These chapters describe detailed provisioning related behavior as well as
conditions and performance monitoring for each of the FSP 3000R7 mod-
ules.
Document Conventions
Typographic Conventions
The documentation follows these typographic conventions:
Convention Description
boldface font Indicates keywords and emphasized words when appearing in
main text areas. All warnings are in boldface font.
italic font Indicates a reference to a chapter, section, figure, table or
related documentation when appearing in main text areas.
All notes and side heads are in italic font.
boldface italic font All cautions and side head titles are in boldface italic font.
courier Everything you have to type into your computer is in
courier.
[] Elements in square brackets are optional.
| Alternative elements are separated by a vertical bar.
^ The symbol ^ represents the key labeled Control - for example,
the key combination ^D means that you have to hold down
the Control key while you press the D key.
< > References are enclosed in angle brackets, for example:
<Esc> The escape key, marked Esc
<Enter> The Enter key, marked ↵
<username> This reference, including the angle brackets, is
replaced by the appropriate user name.
Nonprinting characters, such as passwords.
EPP_Preface.fm
xii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Convention Description
““ Double inverted commas are used to enclose quoted text or a
cross-reference title.
• (bullet symbol) Used in bulleted list of items where the sequence of items is
not relevant.
1., 2., 3. ...or These numbering styles are used in lists of items where the
a., b., c. ... sequence of items is relevant, e.g. the steps listed in a
procedure
* or 1, 2 etc. Are used to point to table footnotes. The markers in the text
are arranged as continuous superscript numbers. Footnote
text (in smaller typeface) is placed at the bottom of a table
and starts with a superscript number.
Change bar (vertical Visually identifies new or changed material (text, figures,
black line usually in tables etc.)
the margin)
-> Refers you to additional information.
Safety Symbols and Message Conventions

The safety alert symbols with the appropriate signal words and the note
signs below are used throughout this documentation to identify
warnings, cautions and notes.
This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to

WARNING the risks caused by electricity. These risks could result in death or
serious injury if the instruction is ignored or not followed
correctly.
This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to a

Caution potentially hazardous situation/condition. This situation/condition,
may result in minor or moderate injury, if the instruction is ignored
or not followed correctly.
This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the

Caution risk of possible laser radiation. This risk may result in serious eye
injury, if the instruction is ignored or not followed correctly.

Caution possibility of equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Damage can occur, if the ESD-prevention instructions are ignored or not
followed correctly.
EPP_Preface.fm
Document Version 7.1.5 xiii

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the risk
Caution of equipment damage, malfunction, process interruption or negative
impacts on surroundings. These events can occur, if the instruction is
ignored or not followed correctly.
A symbol that draws attention to the necessity and importance of

Notice carefully reading all instructions before any installation or operation
takes place. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or damage to
equipment.

Notice proper disposal of waste electrical or electronic equipment and its
components. Disregard of the instruction can threaten the environment.
This symbol accompanies any statement that the user should make a note
of.
Note
A symbol that draws attention to supplemental information and helpful

recommendations that should be observed to ensure smooth operation of
the equipment.
Related Documentation
Refer to the following documents for additional information about the
FSP 3000R7 system:
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Safety Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Installation Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 User Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Troubleshooting Guide
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Module and System Specification
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Hardware Description
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Product Description
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Detailed System Description
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Detailed Procedures
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Deployment Rules
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Element Manager
• FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Network Planner
EPP_Preface.fm
xiv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Obtaining Documentation
World Wide Web
You can access the most current ADVA documentation on the World Wide
Web via your partner login at:
http://www.advaoptical.com/
Documentation CD-ROM
The above mentioned documentation set is available on a CD-ROM which
is delivered with your product. The documentation CD-ROM is updated
with each product release.
EPP_Preface.fm
Document Version 7.1.5 xv

Ordering Documentation
ADVA Partners can order the FSP 3000R7 documentation set and
additional literature through a local ADVA AG Optical Networking sales
representative. For more current product release information, please refer
to ADVA’s home page, or contact ADVA’s Technical Support. See sections
“Obtaining Technical Assistance”, p. xvi and “Contact ADVA”, p. xviii for
contact details.
Documentation Feedback
We want our FSP 3000R7 documentation to be as helpful as possible.
Feedback regarding the guide is therefore always welcome.
You can e-mail your comments/suggestions to:

global-techdocu@advaoptical.com
To submit your comments/suggestions by mail, use the following address:
ADVA AG Optical Networking

Technical Documentation
Märzenquelle 1-3
98617 Meiningen-Dreissigacker
Germany
We appreciate and value your comments/suggestions to improve the

quality of the guide.
Obtaining Technical Assistance

Product Maintenance Agreements and other customer assistance
agreements are available for ADVA AG Optical Networking products
through your ADVA distribution channel. Our service options include:
• 7 X 24 telephone support
• Web-based support tools
• On-site support
• Technical training, both on-site and at ADVA facilities in Germany
and the USA
• Expedited repair service
• Extended hardware warranty service
Partner Login ADVA’s partner login provides a suite of interactive, networking services
that provide immediate access to ADVA information and resources at any
time, from anywhere in the world. This highly integrated internet
application is a powerful, easy-to-use tool for doing business with ADVA.
EPP_Preface.fm
xvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

The partner login’s broad range of features and services help customers
and partners to streamline business processes and improve productivity.
Through your partner login, you will find information tailored especially
for you, including networking solutions, services, and programs.
In addition, you can resolve technical issues with online support services,
download and test software packages, and order ADVA training materials.
Access your partner login via the ADVA home page at:
http://www.advaoptical.com
E-mail questions regarding the partner login to:

Support@advaoptical.com
Technical Support Technical support is available to warranty or maintenance contract
customers who need technical assistance with an ADVA product that is
under warranty or covered by a maintenance contract. To display ADVA’s
Technical Support web site that includes all contact information, go to
ADVA’s home page at:
http://www.advaoptical.com
and select the “Support” button.
To contact ADVA by E-mail, use one of the following addresses:
Europe, Middle East, Africa: Support@advaoptical.com

North America: Support-usa@advaoptical.com
Asia: Support-asia@advaoptical.com
EPP_Preface.fm
Document Version 7.1.5 xvii

Contact ADVA
ADVA AG Optical Networking Tel: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 0

Headquarters Fax: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 199
Fraunhoferstraße 9a info@advaoptical.com
82152 Martinsried/Munich
Germany
ADVA Optical Networking Inc. Tel: +1 201 258 8300

One International Blvd, Suite 705 Fax: +1 201 684 9200
Mahwah, NJ 07495 info@advaoptical.com
USA
ADVA Optical Networking Corp. Tel: +81 (0)3 5408 5891

World Trade Center Building 4F Fax: +81 (0)3 5408 5899
2-4-1 Hamamatsu-cho info-asiapacific@advaoptical.com
Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-6104
Japan
EPP_Preface.fm
xviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Document Revision History
This document revision history lists the locations of, and the descriptions of significant
document changes (additions, corrections, etc.) made in the separate issues of this
documentation. They reflect the corresponding product release. When the changes are extensive,
a general statement giving the nature of the revisions is provided.
Product
Document Release
Version No. Issue Date Details of Issue/Revision Reference covered
7.1 March 2007 First issue of Entity Properties and 7.1
Parameters
7.1.5 June 2007 History of Changes added “Document Revision 7.1.5
History”
The following additions/modifications have been
made to individual chapters:
Chapter 1, new section Section 1.6 “Shelf De-
commissioning”, p. 1-11
Chapter 5, table Table 5-6, 2TCM2G5
Supported Facility
Configurations, p. 5-124
Modification of Chapter 6
Chapter 6, Section
“4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-
D”, p. 6-137
Addition of Document for 4TCA4G (C or D band) Chapter 7: 4TCA4G-
Removal of former document about 4TCA4G C/4TCA4G-D
Modification of Chapter 8 Chapter 8, p. 8-179
Chapter 8, table Table 9-6, 4TCC2G5
Supported Facility
Configurations, p. 9-237
Chapter 10, Section
Modification of Chapter 10 “8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-
D”, p. 10-291
Chapter 11, Section
Modification of Chapter 11 “8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D”,
p. 11-303
Chapter 15, p. 15-345

Chapters 15, 16, table and new sections
regarding supported facilities and their Chapter 16, p. 16-357
configurations
Chapter 22, table of supported facilities Table 22-6, p. 22-428
Table 23-6, p. 23-440
Chapter 23, table of supported facilities
Table 24-2, p. 24-467
Table 26-2, p. 26-591
EPP_History.fm
FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters Document Version 7.1.5 xix
This page intentionally left blank
EPP_History.fm
xx FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Chapter 1
General Provisioning Behavior
This chapter contains information on provisioning related behavior which
is generally applicable, and is therefore not repeated in the various de-
tailed sections within this Part. When specific exceptions exist, they will
be clearly identified in the relevant detailed section.
FW7420 F7 Vol3 General.fm
FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters Document Version 7.1.5 Page 1
1.1 Equipment Level Dependencies

Before a module is provisioned, the shelf which will contain it must be
provisioned. As a side-effect of creating a shelf, each of the slot positions
capable of containing a module within that shelf will automatically be-
come addressable as an equipment entity with the appropriate AID value.
Once an equipment entity becomes addressable, it may be manually pro-
visioned, automatically provisioned if system settings permit, and have
its attribute values retrieved.
In a similar manner, the existence and number of plugs varies based upon
the type of module provisioned. Provisioning an equipment instance
which supports plugs has the side-effect of allowing each of the plugs to
become addressable. Access to attributes of plug equipment entities, in-
cluding physical inventory data and whether the plug is present, will
therefore be possible whenever the containing module level equipment is
provisioned. Whenever a module-level equipment entity has its provision-
ing data deleted, any plug-level equipment entities that exist will become
inaccessible and non-addressable.
Whether an equipment entity (shelf, module or plug) address is defined
or not is independent of whether the auto-provisioning feature of the
network element is enabled or disabled. This means that the data re-
garding plugs that are physically equipped within a de-provisioned
module in a slot will not be accessible via the TL1 interface.
The addresses (i.e. the AID values) of the plug equipment entities are de-
termined by the provisioned type of the module, not the equipped type.
If a module of one type is provisioned and another type is physically
equipped in that position, the attribute values of all plugs supported
by the provisioned module type will be consistent with an un-
equipped state. If the equipped (but mis-matched) module contains
plugs itself, it will not be possible to access any of the properties of
those plugs using the TL1 interface.
The resulting combination of module level provisioning and equipage
conditions and the effects upon the existence of the plug level entities
is summarized in the following table:
Table 1-1: Module and Plug Equipment Existence Dependencies
If the module EQPT

entity is... and the module is equipped with... then the plug EQPT entity(ies) is(are)...
Unequipped and un- (don’t care) non-addressable
provisioned
(UAS&UEQ)
Equipped but un- a module type supporting plugs non-addressable
provisioned (UAS)
a module type which does not support any non-addressable
plugs
Unequipped but (don’t care) defined based upon the provisioned module
provisioned (UEQ) type
Page 2 FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Table 1-1: Module and Plug Equipment Existence Dependencies
If the module EQPT

entity is... and the module is equipped with... then the plug EQPT entity(ies) is(are)...
Equipped and the correct module type, which supports defined based upon the provisioned module
provisioned plugs type and their attribute values will reflect
provisioning and equipage
the correct module type which does not non-addressable
support plugs
the wrong module type (which supports defined based upon the provisioned module
plugs), and the provisioned type supports type but the attribute values will reflect an
plugs unequipped condition
an unknown module type or wrong module defined based upon the provisioned module
type (which does not support plugs), while type but the attribute values will reflect an
the provisioned type supports plugs unequipped condition
the wrong module type (which supports non-addressable
plugs), while the provisioned type does not
support plugs
an unknown module type or wrong module non-addressable
type (which does not support plugs), while
the provisioned type does not support plugs
In addition to these existence rules, modules and plugs also obey rules
related to their state attribute values. The relationship here is that the
state of the module must be of equal or lesser impact to the services it
supports, both directly and indirectly, than that of the plugs contained
within the module. This means that the module level equipment cannot
be placed manually out of service unless all of the plugs contained within
that module are first placed manually out of service, and likewise that the
plug equipment cannot be placed in-service until the module containing
it is first placed in-service. It also means that if there is a fault condition
at the module level, all of the plugs contained within the module will ex-
perience a supporting entity outage (SGEO) condition.
The hierarchical containment relationship between equipment entities of
the various types is shown in Figure 1-1, p. 1-4.
Document Version 7.1.5 Page 3

Main SHELF
Extension
SHELF
MODULE
1 1
N N
SUB-MODULE PLUG
Fig. 1-1: Equipment Hierarchy Containment Relationships

1.2 Facility/Equipment Dependencies
Facilities terminated at a physical port have an inherent dependence
upon the equipment containing that port. The association is reflected in
the AID value of the facility, which includes the shelf, slot and port com-
ponents of the supporting equipment AID value.
Facility existence is gated by the prior existence of the supporting equip-
ment, and likewise, the supporting equipment may not be deprovisioned
until the supported facility(ies) is(are) first deleted.
Once created, the facility state then depends in part on the state of the
supporting equipment. Similar to the dependencies between elements
within the hierarchy of equipment entities, the supporting equipment
state must be of equal or lesser impact to the services supported by the
facility than the state of the facility itself. This means that all facilities
supported by an equipment entity must be placed manually out of service
before it is possible to place the equipment out of service, and likewise
it is not permitted to place a facility in-service until its supporting equip-
ment is first placed in-service. It also means that if there is a fault con-
dition at the supporting equipment level (or recursively the levels above
that in the equipment hierarchy) then the facility will experience a sup-
porting entity outage (SGEO) condition.
In some cases, facilities also have a dependence upon other facilities or
upon plugs not directly supporting them. These will be discussed on a
case by case basis in the relevant sections.

1.3 Protection Group/Facility Dependence

A protection group may not be defined unless all of its member facilities
exist. In addition, member facilities may not be deprovisioned until the
protection group of which they are a member is first deleted. Since pro-
tection groups themselves have no separate state model, there are no
state dependence rules affecting the member facilities as a result of their
membership in the group.
If a facility is either a member of a protection group or if it is permitted
for that facility to be configured as such a member, the facility will sup-
port additional conditions. Further, such facilities may possess one or
more attributes - such as the PATHID attribute - which reflect their mem-
bership status within a protection group and/or their role within that
group. These details will be listed in the sections describing the protected
configurations of the various facility types on each module.

1.4 Dual-Card Protection Configurations
One form of protection is available for use with certain modules providing
redundancy of the network path as well as the modules along the path.
In this dual-card protection configuration, two modules of the same gen-
eral type are used in conjunction with one or more passive optical split-
ter/combiner modules (1PM or 2PM modules) to provide the protection
features. The protection achieved by this configuration is effectively pro-
tection of the network side signal and equipment, but the mechanism
achieves this by operation of the paired modules on the client side.
In this configuration, the incoming client signals are optically split and
sent to each of the paired modules, which are therefore both able to
transmit exactly the same client signals over the network path. In the op-
posite direction, the client side signals being transmitted from each of
the paired modules are optically coupled and sent to the client NE. In or-
der to avoid a collision of the two optical signals from the paired modules
in this direction, the modules will operate so that only the active module
(which is a member of the active network path) enables its client side la-
ser(s). By ensuring that only the client side lasers on the active module
are enabled, the configuration provides redundant paths within the net-
work for the client signals. This configuration is employed at both ends
of the network so that the same operation is performed at either end.
This also has the inherent side-effect of rendering inactive the embedded
operations channel on the inactive client port, and requires provisioning
of such a channel on both client ports, along with separate associations
to a corresponding LINK entity, if protection of said channel is desired.
Since the dual-card scheme employs passive optical splitter/combiner
modules, it is not possible to verify that such devices are actually present
and correctly configured to support the protection group operations.
Therefore, it is possible to provision such protection groups even when
the needed passive modules and cable connections are not physically
present. Note that since optical splitting is an integral part of the con-
figuration, it is not possible to use SFP-E type pluggable modules on the
client ports of modules within such a protection group. Further, forced
operation and loopbacks should not be performed on any client side fa-
cilities within such a protection group. The provisioning of the module
equipment type and of the network side facility type on each of the pro-
tection group members must be and remain the same - this rule is verified
and enforced by the system software.
Since the operation of such a protection group is managed on a network
facility basis, it is crucial that all of the client ports actually being used
on the paired modules be cabled correctly - if this is not done, a protec-
tion switch may cause one of the client signals to be lost in one or both

directions. It also means that the facility types on each of the like client
ports on the paired modules must be provisioned to be of the same type,
although this rule is not verified by the system nor enforced.
It is also recommended, but not enforced, that the provisioned values of
attributes controlling factors such as signal degrade thresholds and the
like be set to equal values on the corresponding facilities of the paired
modules to avoid unexpected protection switching behavior which may
otherwise result.
Depending upon the nature of the equipment connections on the client
side, it may or may not be necessary for any pluggable modules used on
these ports to be of the same type, since most optical receivers have a
broad spectral response, however it is recommended that paired ports be
equipped and provisioned with the same choice of pluggable module to
ensure that there are no unintended side-effects introduced due to dif-
ferences in optical performance among differing type of pluggable mod-
ules.

1.5 System Initiated Automatic Provisioning
While many of the equipment and facility instances may be optionally
provisioned in an autonomous manner, depending upon whether the
auto-provisioning feature is enabled or disabled, some instances will al-
ways be automatically provisioned, and in some cases even automatically
deleted. The cases where this behavior applies are as follows:
• When a shelf is provisioned, all of the equipment (slot) positions
supported by that shelf become addressable. They will not auto-
provision unless a module is equipped and the auto-provisioning
feature is enabled.
• When a module which supports one or more plugs is provisioned, all
of the plug positions supported by the module become addressable.
They will not auto-provision unless they are physically equipped and
the auto-provisioning feature is enabled, or unless they are
specifically listed within this document section as an exception.
• The following types of modules will always auto-provision at the
module level when they are inserted into an un-provisioned slot in a
provisioned shelf:
• NCU/NCU2E
• SCU
• SCU-E
• PSU7HU-AC
• PSU7HU-DC
• FCU7HU
• 2OSCM
• OSCM
• When an NCU/NCU2E is provisioned, the LANIP and Serial Link
(SERIAL) facilities will always auto-provision.
• When an OSCM or 2OSCM module is equipped, its supported Ethernet
facilities (the C1, C2, C3 and N ports for the OSCM and the C1, C2,
C3, NW and NE ports on the 2OSCM) will always auto-provision.
• When an SCU or an SCU-E auto-provisions, it will cause the shelf
containing it to auto-provision as well if that shelf does not already
exist. This auto-provisioning will have the side-effect of causing the
module positions within the shelf to become addressable, as noted
above. The SCU/SCU-E provide the management plane with visibility
to the shelf and the contained modules therein for the shelf in
which the module resides. Note that in order for a shelf to auto-
provision, therefore, the following criteria must be met:
i. the shelf must contain an operating power supply which is con-
nected to an adequate power source,
ii. the shelf must contain an SCU or SCU-E module which is func-
tioning correctly,
iii.the shelf must be connected so that it becomes visible to the
NCU/NCU2E (i.e. it must either be the shelf containing the

NCU/NCU2E or be connected via the SCU/SCU-E inter-shelf con-

nection(s) so that the NCU/NCU2E is able to communicate with

it).
• When a plug in an SCU or an SCU-E module is inserted (including
cases where the insertion is detected as a side-effect of a module
containing the plug being inserted) the plug equipment and its
associated facility type will always auto-provision. (Note that the
plugs will not be auto-provisioned merely because the module is
inserted - the plug itself must be present to trigger the auto-
provisioning of the plug and associated facility.)
• On the 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D modules, the VCH
facilities will always be auto-provisioned when the latter of the
network facility and the VCHs corresponding client facility are
created.
• On the 4TCC2G5 type modules, the VC4/VC3/STS1 facilities are
automatically provisioned when a GFP instance is provisioned to
reference them, and are automatically deleted when the GFP
instance reference to them is deleted. In the case of a VC4
containing VC3s, the VC4 will be created when the first VC3
contained therein is created, and will be deleted when the last VC3
contained therein is deleted.

1.6 Shelf De-commissioning
In order to remove a shelf from a Network Element configuration, the fol-
lowing rules must be obeyed:
• All of the modules contained within the shelf must first be deleted,
including the SCU/SCU-E module acting as the shelf controller,
• The shelf itself must be manually out-of-service, and should be
placed into this state prior to the deletion of the SCU/SCU-E module
within that shelf.
Once the shelf is deleted, further provisioning changes may be needed to
remove the supporting extension shelf control link facilities, if the shelf
was an extension shelf. If the shelf was part of a control link ring or daisy-
chained link, re-cabling to bypass the deleted shelf will be required to re-
store proper operation of the control link.

1.7 Plug Related MEA Conditions

A wide range of pluggable module types and variants are supported for
use in various ports in order to reduce the overall inventory of parts and
simplify the task of equipment sparing. The ability to select different
plugs which are suited to specific physical line attributes for the many
types of facilities supported by a given type of module provides further
convenience in customizing the product to meet the needs of various ap-
plications. However, the associated rules for which conditions may arise
and which entity may report them in various cases of mis-match need to
be clearly understood in order to perform accurate equipment planning,
installation and troubleshooting.
The rules and system behavior associated with the use of pluggable mod-
ules and the resulting potential mismatch type conditions which may be
reported are as follows:
1. MEA-ACCEPT is the highest precedence condition of the set (i.e. if
this condition exists, none of the others discussed here could exist
even in theory). MEA-ACCEPT will be raised in all cases where a plug
type (i.e. SFP-C, SFP-D, etc.) is never valid in the given plug
position (this corresponds to blank cells in all of the variants of a
type listed in the SFP/XFP Plug usage tables shown in Volume 2 of
the manual, assuming a plug is used in that port position) or when
the plug type is unable to support any of the facility types allowable
for that port. This condition is reported whether or not the plug
position is provisioned.
2. Whenever a plug of a valid type is inserted, the plug will auto-
provision using the plugs’ actual type, rate, channel and reach if
auto-provisioning is enabled.
3. A plug may be manually pre-provisioned, in which case the type,
rate, channel and reach must be specified explicitly or via the
supported default values. In this case, it may be possible for the
RATE attribute to be set to the value ANY.
4. Whenever a plug is provisioned and a plug is physically inserted into
that position, the properties of the equipped plug will be verified
against the provisioned settings and the following steps will occur
in the order listed:
i. if the plug type is never valid for the given plug position, an
MEA-ACCEPT condition will be raised
ii. if the plug is of a type which is valid for the plug position but is
not of the provisioned type or channel, an MEA-PHYS condition
will be raised
iii.if the plug is of the correct type and channel but the supported
rates do not include the provisioned rate (which is not “ANY”),
an MEA-PHYS condition will be raised
iv. if the plug is of the correct type and channel but the reach is less
than the provisioned reach, an MEA-PHYS condition will be

raised
v. if the plug is not a vendor approved part, an MEA-APPROVE con-
dition will be raised

vi. if the plug is of the correct type and channel but the supported
rate exceeds the provisioned rate (which is not “ANY”), an MEA-
DIFFER condition will be raised
vii.if the plug is of the correct type and channel but the reach ex-
ceeds the provisioned reach, an MEA-DIFFER condition will be
raised
viii.if an associated facility is provisioned and the plug cannot sup-
port the type of the facility, an Data Rate Not Supported condi-
tion will be raised by the facility (this can only occur if the
provisioned RATE attribute is ANY and the equipped plug match-
es the type, channel and reach but supports a rate which is in-
compatible with the provisioned facility type).

1.8 Shelf and Module Related MEA Conditions

Many of the supported module types are available in a number of variants
with slightly different properties, such as the optical channel of the em-
bedded interface(s) on transponders or muxponders, or the optical spec-
trum band supported by amplifiers. When a module is provisioned,
attribute values are specified (either explicitly or via defined default val-
ues) which determine the exact variant of the module which is intended
to be used in that instance. The UNITNAME attribute conveys the proper-
ties of the physically equipped module which are then used in evaluating
whether an MEA condition exists. If a module inserted in a slot does not
exactly match the specified settings, an equipment condition known as
MEA (Mismatch of Equipment versus Attributes) will be raised to flag the
discrepancy.
While equipped modules of an equipment type different than that provi-
sioned will always lead to a mismatch condition, there are many other
more specific cases which will also lead to an equipment mismatch. A
mapping explaining how the UNITNAME value is related to those at-
tributes used for provisioning the module will be provided in each of the
following shelf and module related sections. In order to understand how
the UNITNAME is compared against these other attribute values to deter-
mine whether an MEA condition exists, it is also essential to understand
the structure of the UNITNAME attribute. The UNITNAME attribute is a 32
character string structured as follows:
[<multi-instance port count>]<general functional class>({‘-

’|’#’|’+’}+<functional qualifier>)*
where:
• <multi-instance port count> is omitted if the module does not have
multiple instances of a particular type of port or if the number is
always fixed for modules of that <general functional class>,
• <general functional class> conveys the function provided by the
module, including whether the module is intended for use in
providing Enterprise, Access or Core network type services, and
• <functional qualifier> conveys details such as optical reach, optical
band, the specific wavelength or channel number supported on a
fixed frequency interface, signal rate(s) supported, optical amplifier
gain levels or the like.
Some examples of how the structure is used in different cases are:

Table 1-2: Examples of UNITNAME Structure
Matching Equipment Attributes
Example UNITNAME value UNITNAME Elements Name Value

OSCM-V#1630 <multi-instance port count> is absent, Equipment Type OSCM
OSCM is the <general functional class> indicating
an Optical Supervisory Channel Module,
-V indicates a VLONG reach optical interface,
#1630 indicates the optical wavelength
4TCC-PC-2G7-10G-V-#D34 <multi-instance port count> is 4 (the number of Equipment Type 4TCC10G-D
client ports), Channel D34
TCC is the <general functional class> indicating a Reach VLONG
Transponder module for Core services.
-PC, -2G7 and -10G indicate detailed properties
of the module such as Pluggable Clients and the
client and network port signal rates,
-V indicates a VLONG reach optical interface,
-#D34 indicates the optical wavelength of the
network port corresponds to DWDM channel
number 34 (fc=190.90 THz or λc=1570.42 nm).
1GSM-#D01-#D04 <multi-instance port count> is absent, Equipment Type 1GSMU-D
1GSMU is the <general functional class> GROUP D01-D04
indicating a 1 optical Group Splitter Module,
-#D01 and #D04 indicate the lower and upper
bound DWDM optical channels split from the
main optical signal (fc=196.00 THz or
λc=1529.55 nm and fc=195.70 THz or
λc=1531.90 nm, respectively)
EDFA-C-D20-GC <multi-instance port count> is absent, Equipment Type EDFA-DGC
EDFA is the <general functional class> indicating BAND C
an Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifier, POWER 20
-C indicates the amplifier operates in the C band,
-D20 indicates the amplifier operates with a
nominal output power level of 20 dBm
-GC indicates the amplifier is Gain Controlled

1.9 Filter Module Configurations

In CWDM, DWDM and hybrid configurations, a number of different filter
modules may be used to split and combine single wavelengths, wave-
length bands and/or wavelength groups on an optical transmission line.
The optical filters are used in a cascaded arrangement where those closer
to the optical transmission line filter broader spectral portions than those
further from the line. This model also allows wavelength bands or groups
to be passed through a node very efficiently when desired, since a full
optical demultiplexing, and the subsequent re-multiplexing, of the signal
is not required.
Each of the optical filter assemblies possess specific optical properties
such as passband and optical loss, which makes certain modules more or
less suited to certain applications and system configurations. Each of the
following sections describes the possible arrangements of filter module
types which may be used in conjunction to achieve the indicated system
capacities and WDM channel plans. In addition to the combinations list-
ed, though, it is also possible to connect a channel module directly to a
filter port which supports multiple possible wavelengths, provided the
following rules are met:
a. the client side (i.e. smaller multi-wavelength channel count) port
connected to the channel module must correspond to a spectral
region in which only one wavelength is in use,
b. the transmit wavelength of the channel module must correspond to a
channel within the spectral region of the filter module to which it is
connected.
Provided these rules are obeyed, the channel module will operate over the
multi-wavelength capable filter port. Note that these rules are not en-
forced by the system software, and if they are not obeyed a loss of traffic
on the associated channel modules is possible. Since the receivers are
broad spectrum devices, it should also be noted that it is possible in such
cases for communications to occur between channel modules operating
at different transmit wavelengths within the spectral region of the filter
port.
1.9.1 Filter Combinations in Point-to-point Configurations

When used in a point-to-point application, the system is able to support
several CWDM, DWDM and hybrid configurations with channel counts sim-
ilar to those of ring configurations, and also higher capacity DWDM con-
figurations1 supporting up to 40 channels in each of the C and L bands
for a total of up to 80 channels. Due to the loss of the 40 channel DWDM
modules, they may only be used in such a point-to-point configuration.
In a point-to-point configuration, the OSC is used to provide a remote
communications link between the NEs within the network for OAM&P
functions. Protection is provided by means of the RSM-OLM or RSM-SF
1. Versus the ring configurations maximum of 32 DWDM channels in each of the C and L
bands.

modules, which do not require the OSC for support of protection switching
functions - in fact, use of the RSM-OLM precludes the use of an OSC since
it employs a laser operating at the OSC wavelength in order to monitor
the line quality. Thus, in the point-to-point configuration, the OSC is an
optional element and the corresponding filter layer may be omitted in
cases where the OSC is not used.
The WDM channels supported by the various point-to-point system con-
figurations are thus as shown in the table below, where empty cells indi-
cate that cascaded filter modules at that stage are not needed. Each row
summarizes a filter module combination which may be used to achieve
the listed WDM configuration. In cases where the same type of configu-
ration is listed in separate rows, each row describes a filter plan which
may be used independently to achieve that type of configuration. Config-
urations which include multiple sub-rows and which pertain to hybrid
CWDM/DWDM channel configurations show the CWDM portion of the filter
module plan in the first sub-row and the DWDM portion in the second sub-
row. Configurations which include multiple sub-rows for a CWDM or a
DWDM configuration require the use of the filter types shown in all sub-
rows in combination to achieve the indicated channel counts. In all cas-
es, single channel filtering stages which are cascaded represent the max-
imum number of such cascades permitted - intermediate stages may be
omitted if desired.
Table 1-3: WDM Point-to-point Configuration Filter Plans
Filter Stages
WDM Configuration 1sta 2ndb 3rd 4th 5th

80 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 40CSM-D
64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 2BSM-D 4GSM-D 4CSM-D
64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 8GSM-D 4CSM-D
40 channel DWDM (C or L Band) OSFM 40CSM-D
32 channel DWDM (C or L Band) OSFM 2BSM-D 4GSM-D 4CSM-D
32 channel DWDM (C or L Band) OSFM 8GSM-D 4CSM-D
8 channel CWDM OSFM 8CSMU-C
8 channel CWDM OSFM 2ABSM-C 4CSM-C
5 to 7 channel CWDM OSFM 2ABSM-C 4CSM-C
1CSMU-C 1CSMU-C 1CSM-C
Up to 4 channel CWDM OSFM 1CSMU-C 1CSMU-C 1CSMU-C 1CSM-C
Up to 4 channel CWDM (A sub- OSFM 2ABSM-C 4CSM-Cc or up to 2 1CSMU-C modules in series
band) + up to 32 channel DWDM followed by a 1CSM-C module
(C Band)
8GSM-D 4CSM-D
Up to 4 channel CWDM (A sub- OSFM 2ABSM-C 4CSM-Cc. or up to 2 1CSMU-C modules in series
band) + up to 32 channel DWDM followed by a 1CSM-C module

(C Band)
2BSM-D 4GSM-D 4CSM-D

a. As noted above, the OSFM stage is optional. If the configuration employs an RSM-OLM for line switching, the RSM-OLM
MUST be used in place of the OSFM.
b. If a 2ABSM-C is listed here, a 3BSM-C may be used instead to support a 1310 nm system overlay. In all other cases a
1CSMU-G module may be added prior to stage 2 in order to support a 1310 nm system overlay. The RSM-SF module may not
be used if a filter module providing 1310 nm access is used.
c. The A sub-band variant of the module only.
1.9.2 Filter Combinations in Ring Configurations

When used in a ring application, several different CWDM, DWDM and hy-
brid configurations are supported. In many cases, the OSC is used to pro-
vide not only an OAM&P message communications link between the NEs
within the ring, but also to support module based protection services em-
ploying the VSM module. Still, the OSC is not required in all cases, and
the OSC filter layer may be omitted in cases where the OSC is not used.
The WDM channels supported by a ring system configuration are shown in
the table below, where empty cells indicate that cascaded filter modules
at that stage are not needed. Each row defines a filter module combina-
tion which may be used to achieve the associated type of WDM configu-
ration. In cases where the same type of configuration is listed in separate
rows, each row describes a filter plan which may be used independently
to achieve that type of configuration. Configurations which include mul-
tiple sub-rows and which pertain to hybrid CWDM/DWDM channel config-
urations show the CWDM portion of the filter module plan in the first sub-
row and the DWDM portion in the second sub-row. Configurations which
include multiple sub-rows for a CWDM or a DWDM configuration require
the use of the filter types shown in all sub-rows in combination to achieve
the indicated channel counts unless noted otherwise.
If a Network Element within a ring system accesses at least one channel,
that NE is an Optical Add-Drop Multiplexer (OADM). At an OADM each op-
tical channel may be added and/or dropped or may pass through from one
line to another.
The table below shows the filter combinations for only one line side of an
OADM. Note that in order for a given channel to be added and/or dropped
from the lines on opposite sides of the OADM, filters providing access to
the same channel must therefore be equipped on both sides of the NE.
When single channel filter modules are used (i.e. those ending in “-EW-
C” or -EW-D” for CWDM and DWDM cases, respectively) that single module
provides the access needed for both line sides provided an optical pass-
through path exists. Channels may be passed through by direct fiber con-
nections between equivalent ports on the various filter modules at any

level - i.e. whether the port in question is a single or multi-wavelength
port. The table therefore shows the filter modules used in the case of add-
ing and/or dropping the maximum number of channels.
Table 1-4: WDM Ring Configuration Filter Plans
Filter Stages

64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 2BSM-D 4GSM-D 4CSM-D
64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 8GSM-D 4CSM-D
Partial Add/Drop 64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 2BSM-D (4GSM-D then 4CSM-D) and
(1GSMU-D then a 4CSM-D and
either a 1CSMU-EW-D or a
4CSMU-D)
Partial Add/Drop 64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 2BSM-D (4GSM-D then 4CSM-D) and
(4CSMU-D or 1CSMU-EW-D) then
a (4CSMU-D or 1CSMU-EW-D)
Partial Add/Drop 64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 2BSM-D and 1 1GSMU-D then a 4CSM-D and
or 2 of either a 1CSMU-EW-D or a
4CSMU-D
Partial Add/Drop 64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 8GSM-D Nx(4CSM-D where N < 8) and up
to 8-N of a 1CSMU-EW-D
followed by a 1CSMU-EW-D
Partial Add/Drop 64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or
1CSMU-EW-D 1CSMU-EW-D 1CSMU-EW-D
Partial Add/Drop 64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 4CSMU-D or 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and
1CSMU-EW-D either 1CSMU-
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
Partial Add/Drop 64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSMU-D or
either 1CSMU- 1CSMU-EW-D
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
Partial Add/Drop 64 channel DWDM OSFM 2CLSM-D 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSM-D and
1GSMU-D either 1CSMU-
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
Partial Add/Drop 32/64 channel OSFM 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or
DWDM 1CSMU-EW-D 1CSMU-EW-D 1CSMU-EW-D 1CSMU-EW-D
Partial Add/Drop 32/64 channel OSFM 4CSMU-D or 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSMU-D or
DWDM 1CSMU-EW-D either 1CSMU- 1CSMU-EW-D
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
Partial Add/Drop 32/64 channel OSFM 4CSMU-D or 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSM-D and
DWDM 1CSMU-EW-D 1GSMU-D either 1CSMU-
EW-D or
4CSMU-D

Filter Stages

Partial Add/Drop 32/64 channel OSFM 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and
DWDM either 1CSMU- either 1CSMU-
EW-D or 4CSMU- EW-D or
D 4CSMU-D
Partial Add/Drop 32/64 channel OSFM 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or
DWDM either 1CSMU- 1CSMU-EW-D 1CSMU-EW-D
EW-D or 4CSMU-
D
Partial Add/Drop 32/64 channel OSFM 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSM-D and 4CSM-D and
DWDM 1GSMU-D 1GSMU-D either 1CSMU-
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
Partial Add/Drop 32/64 channel OSFM 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSM-D and 4CSMU-D or
DWDM 1GSMU-D either 1CSMU- 1CSMU-EW-D
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
32 channel DWDM (C or L Band) OSFM 2BSM-D 4GSM-D 4CSM-D
32 channel DWDM (C or L Band) OSFM 8GSM-D 4CSM-D
Partial (Max. 28 channel) Add/Drop OSFM 2BSM-D (4GSM-D then 4CSM-D) and 1 of the following:
32 channel DWDM (C or L Band)
4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or
4CSMU-D or 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSMU-D or
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSM-D and
EW-D or
4CSMU-D

Filter Stages

Partial (Max. 24 channel) Add/Drop OSFM 2BSM-D and 1 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or
32 channel DWDM (C or L Band) or 2 of: 1CSMU-EW-D 1CSMU-EW-D 1CSMU-EW-D
4CSMU-D or 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSMU-D or
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSM-D and
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
Partial (Max. 31 channel) Add/Drop OSFM 8GSM-D Nx(4CSM-D where N < 8) and up to 8-N of a
32 channel DWDM (C or L Band) 1CSMU-EW-D followed by a 1CSMU-EW-D followed
by a 1CSMU-EW-D
8 channel CWDM OSFM 8CSMU-C
8 channel CWDM OSFM 2ABSM-C 4CSM-C
5 to 7 channel CWDM OSFM 2ABSM-C 4CSM-C
1CSMU-EW-C 1CSMU-EW-C 1CSM-C or
1CSMU-EW-C
Up to 4 channel CWDM OSFM 1CSMU-EW-C 1CSMU-EW-C 1CSMU-EW-C 1CSM-C or
1CSMU-EW-C
Up to 4 channel CWDM (A sub- OSFM 2ABSM-C 4CSM-Cc or up to 3 1CSMU-EW-C modules in series
band) + 32 channel DWDM (C Band)
8GSM-D 4CSM-D
Up to 4 channel CWDM (A sub- OSFM 2ABSM-C 4CSM-Cc. or up to 3 1CSMU-EW-C modules in series
band) + 32 channel DWDM (C Band)
2BSM-D 4GSM-D 4CSM-D
band) + Partial Add/Drop 32
channel DWDM (C Band) 2BSM-D (4GSM-D then 4CSM-D) and
(1GSMU-D then a 4CSM-D and
either a 1CSMU-EW-D or a
4CSMU-D)
channel DWDM (C Band) 2BSM-D (4GSM-D then 4CSM-D) and

Filter Stages

channel DWDM (C Band) 2BSM-D and 1 1GSMU-D then a 4CSM-D and
or 2 of either a 1CSMU-EW-D or a
4CSMU-D
channel DWDM (C Band) 8GSM-D Nx(4CSM-D where N < 8) and up
to 8-N of a 1CSMU-EW-D
followed by a 1CSMU-EW-D
channel DWDM (C Band) 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or 4CSMU-D or
channel DWDM (C Band) 4CSMU-D or 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
channel DWDM (C Band) 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSMU-D or
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
channel DWDM (C Band) 1GSMU-D 4CSM-D and 4CSM-D and
EW-D or
4CSMU-D
a. As noted above, the OSFM stage is optional.
b. If a 2ABSM-C is listed here, a 3BSM-C may be used instead to support a 1310 nm system overlay. In all other cases a
1CSMU-G module may be added prior to stage 2 in order to support a 1310 nm system overlay (note that the RSM-SF module
is not permitted in a ring configuration, so its 1310 nm related exclusion does not apply here).
c. The A sub-band variant of the module only. Note that in all such configurations the CWDM and/or DWDM C-Band signals
may be passed through transparently by direct fiber connection between the relevant second stage filter module ports.

Chapter 2
Provisioning Pluggable Modules
This chapter contains the following modules:
2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24
2.2 “SFP-D”, p. 2-26
2.3 “SFP-E”, p. 2-29
2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31
2.5 “XFP-G”, p. 2-33
FW7420 F7 Vol3 SFPs.fm
2.1 SFP-C
The attributes associated with the SFP-C plugs, including their default
values are as shown in the following tables. Some modules support only
a limited subset of the possible plug types within this variant, so some
of the attribute values may effectively be limited to a subset of the values
listed here. In such cases, the descriptions provided in the relevant sec-
tion of the containing module will indicate the restrictions which are en-
forced.
Table 2-1: SFP-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Access Provisioning provisionin
Attribute Name Type Allowed Values Default g Default Comments
Equipment Type RE SFP-C SFP-C
CLEI Code R 10 character This value is read from the equipment.
string
Alias RW 64 character The default value is a null
string string.
Hardware R 16 character This value is read from the equipment.
Revision string
Part Number R 10 character This value is read from the equipment.
string
Serial Number R 16 character This value is read from the equipment.
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the equipment.
string
Vendor Code R 16 character This value is read from the equipment.
string
Usage of 3rd Rw { DISABLE } DISABLE DISABLE
Party Plugs
Channel RE { C1470 | Value
C1490 | C1510 | matching
C1530 | C1550 | the
C1570 | C1590 | equipped
C1610 } device
Rate RE { 2G5 | 4G | FE | ANY ANY The value ANY allows a physi-
ANY } cal plug supporting any of the
identified discrete rates to be
used without causing an MEA
condition.
Reach RE { VLONG | Value Optical reach of the port. If
LONG | matching the RATE parameter is 4G only
ULONG } the the value LONG is allowed,
equipped while if the RATE parameter is
device FE only the value ULONG is

allowed.

Table 2-1: SFP-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Admin State RW { IS | MGT | AINS | MGT AINS | MGT If the SYS attribute AISPENA is
AINS | MT | set, AINS will be used as the
DSBLD } default value for both manual
creation and auto-provision-
ing, otherwise OOS will be
used as the default value in
both cases. The mappings to
target states in the GR-1093-
CORE model are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
• AINS to OOS-AU, AINS
• MT to OOS-MA, MT
• DSBLD to OOS-MA, DSBLD
Table 2-2: SFP-C EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type and
PM Register Range Name Min Max Default
Temperature NEND NA NA Decimal 1 TEMP-FHT N/A N/A 55.0
TEMP-FLT N/A N/A 5.0
Table 2-3: SFP-C EQPT Conditions
Condition
Time Type/Alarm Severity may Effect Upon
Condition Location Direction Interval Severity be set Service
Plug Not Accepted NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Plug not Approved NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Plug Provision Mismatch NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Plug Physical Mismatch NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
OOS AINS NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
OOS Disabled NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
OOS Management NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
OOS Maintenance NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
Equipment Removed NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Voltage out of Range NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
TEMP Too High NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA

TEMP Too Low NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA

2.2 SFP-D
The attributes associated with the SFP-D plugs, including their default
forced.
Table 2-4: SFP-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Access Provisioning provisioning
Attribute Name Type Allowed Values Default Default Comments
Equipment Type RE SFP-D SFP-D
string
Alias RW 64 character The default value is a null string.
string
Revision string
string
string
string
string
Party Plugs
Channel RE { D01 .. D64 | Value matching
DC1 .. DC9 | the equipped
DL1 .. DL9 } device
Rate RE { 2G5 } 2G5 2G5
Reach RE { ULONG | Value matching
VLONG } the equipped
device

Table 2-4: SFP-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Admin State RW { IS | MGT | AINS | MGT AINS | MGT If the SYS attribute
AINS | MT | AISPENA is set, AINS will
DSBLD } be used as the default
value for both manual cre-
ation and auto-provision-
ing, otherwise OOS will be
used as the default value in
both cases. The mappings
to target states in the GR-
1093-CORE model are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
• DSBLD to OOS-MA,
DSBLD
Table 2-5: SFP-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type and
Table 2-6: SFP-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 2-6: SFP-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

2.3 SFP-E
The attributes associated with the SFP-E plugs, including their default
forced.
Table 2-7: SFP-E EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Access Allowed Provisioning provisioning
Attribute Name Type Values Default Default Comments
Equipment Type RE SFP-E SFP-E
string
string string.
Revision string
string
string
string
string
Party Plugs
Rate RE { GBE } GBE GBE
Reach R { INTRA } N/A N/A
Admin State RW { IS | MGT | AINS | MGT AINS | MGT If the SYS attribute AISPENA is set,
AINS | MT | AINS will be used as the default
DSBLD } value for both manual creation and
auto-provisioning, otherwise OOS
will be used as the default value in
both cases. The mappings to target
states in the GR-1093-CORE model
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 2-8: SFP-E EQPT Conditions
Condition
Plug Provision NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Mismatch
Plug Physical NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Mismatch

2.4 SFP-G
The attributes associated with the SFP-G plugs, including their default
forced.
Table 2-9: SFP-G EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE SFP-G‘ SFP-G
string
string string.
Revision string
string
string
string
string
Party Plugs
Channel RE { G850 | Value
G1310 } matching the For valid combinations, refer to TL-1
equipped Manual or contact Technical Support.
device
Rate RE { 4G | 2G5 | ANY ANY The value ANY allows a physical
2G1 | HS | CL | plug supporting any of the identi-
ANY } fied discrete rates to be used with-
out causing an MEA condition.
For valid combinations, refer to TL-1

Manual or contact Technical Support.
Reach RE { SHORT | Value
INTRA | matching the For valid combinations, refer to TL-1
LONG } equipped Manual or contact Technical Support.
device

Table 2-9: SFP-G EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 2-10: SFP-G EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type and
Table 2-11: SFP-G EQPT Conditions
Condition


2.5 XFP-G
The attributes associated with the XFP-G plugs, including their default
forced.
Table 2-12: XFP-G EQPT Attributes
Acces Manual Auto-

s Allowed Provisioning provisioning
Equipment Type RE XFP-G XFP-G
string
string string.
Revision string
string
string
string
string
Party Plugs
Channel RE { G850 | Value matching
G1310 | G1550 the equipped
} device
Rate RE { 10G | 11G } Value matching
the equipped
device
Reach RE { SHORT | Value matching
INTRA | the equipped
LONG } device

Table 2-12: XFP-G EQPT Attributes
Acces Manual Auto-

s Allowed Provisioning provisioning
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 2-13: XFP-G EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type and
Table 2-14: XFP-G EQPT Conditions
Condition


Chapter 3
Filter Modules
This chapter contains the following sections:
3.1 “1CSMU-C”, p. 3-36
3.2 “1CSMU-G”, p. 3-39
3.3 “1CSMU-EW-C”, p. 3-42
3.4 “1CSMU-EW-D”, p. 3-46
3.5 “1GSMU-D”, p. 3-50
3.6 “2ABSM-C”, p. 3-53
3.7 “2BSM-D”, p. 3-56
3.8 “2CLSM-D”, p. 3-59
3.9 “3BSM-C”, p. 3-62
3.10 “40CSM-D”, p. 3-65
3.11 “4CSM-C”, p. 3-68
3.12 “4CSM-D”, p. 3-71
3.13 “4CSMU-D”, p. 3-75
3.14 “4GSM-D”, p. 3-79
3.15 “8CSMU-C”, p. 3-82
3.16 “8GSM-D”, p. 3-85
3.17 “OSFM”, p. 3-88
3.18 “PSM”, p. 3-91
FW7420 F7 Vol3 Filters.fm
3.1 1CSMU-C
The 1CSMU-C module is a passive optical filter module providing access
to a single CWDM channel on the client port while allowing all other chan-
nels to pass through the module between the network and upgrade ports.
Each module provides support for both add and drop directions of traffic
flow. The 1CSMU-C module exists in 8 different variants - 1 per CWDM
channel. All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 1CSMU-C modules
optical functions are entirely passive, it is able to be placed in any avail-
able slot and will provide the necessary optical signal filtering even if
electrical power to the module is lost. Due to this passive nature, the
Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the module is very high.
In this release, the fiber connections are not modelled or managed, and
so there are no facility instances supported by this module. Connections
to and from the 1CSMU-C module must be manually verified during instal-
lation or re-configuration. The optical specifications of the module are as
follows:
Table 3-1: 1CSMU-C Module Optical Specifications
Module Property Specification

Add port insertion loss 1.5 dB
Drop port insertion loss 1.5 dB
Drop port isolation >55 dB
Upgrade port add path insertion loss 1.0 dB
Upgrade port drop path insertion loss 1.5 dB
Upgrade port drop path isolation >12 dB
Passband width 13 nm (ITU-T G.694.2)
Directivity >50 dB
Optical return loss >45 dB
3.1.1 Equipment Provisioning
3.1.1.1 Module Attributes

The attributes associated with this module, including their default values
for manual entry and auto-provisioning, are as shown in the following ta-
bles:
Table 3-2: 1CSMU-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-

Equipment Type RE 1CSMU-C 1CSMU-C

Manual Auto-
string
string string.
FW Package R 8 character This value is read from the equipment.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 1CSM+#Cxxxx where the value of
string equipment. Cxxxx is equal to that of the
CHANNEL attribute.
string
Channel RE { C1470 | C1490 see comment Auto-provisioning default will
| C1510 | C1530 match the equipped module.
| C1550 | C1570
| C1590 | C1610
}
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-3: 1CSMU-C EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
PM Register and Range Name Min Max Default


Table 3-4: 1CSMU-C EQPT Conditions
Condition
Boot up completed NEND NA NA TC No
Boot up failed NEND NA NA TC No
Install FWP completed NEND NA NA TC No
Boot up started NEND NA NA TC No
FWPM is NSA NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
FWPM is SA NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
General HW Fault NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Equipment Mismatch NEND NA NA CR Yes SA

3.2 1CSMU-G
The 1CSMU-G module is a passive optical filter module providing access
to a single “grey” channel on the client port while allowing all other
channels to pass through the module between the network and upgrade
ports. Each module provides support for both add and drop directions of
traffic flow. The 1CSMU-G module exists in 3 different variants - 1 per
“grey” channel. All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 1CSMU-G
modules optical functions are entirely passive, it is able to be placed in
any available slot and will provide the necessary optical signal filtering
even if electrical power to the module is lost. Due to this passive nature,
the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the module is very high.
to and from the 1CSMU-G module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-5: 1CSMU-G Module Optical Specifications

Directivity >50 dB

bles:
Table 3-6: 1CSMU-G EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Access Allowed Provisionin provisioning
Attribute Name Type Values g Default Default Comments
Equipment Type RE 1CSMU-G 1CSMU-G
string

string string.

Table 3-6: 1CSMU-G EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 1CSM+#Gxxxx where the value of
string equipment. Gxxxx is equal to that of the
Channel attribute.
string
Channel RE { G1310 } see comment Auto-provisioning default will
match the equipped module.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-7: 1CSMU-G EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-8: 1CSMU-G EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 3-8: 1CSMU-G EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.3 1CSMU-EW-C
The 1CSMU-EW-C module is a double density version of the 1CSMU-C mod-
ule intended for use in ring applications where a given CWDM channel is
to be added and dropped from both sides of the ring at a Network Ele-
ment. Each half of the module contains a pair of passive optical filters
providing add and drop access to a single CWDM channel on the client
port while allowing all other channels to pass through the module be-
tween the network and express ports. The 1CSMU-EW-C module exists in
8 different variants - 1 per CWDM channel, which is always the same chan-
nel on both the East and West halves of the module. All optical connec-
tors are LC type. Since the 1CSMU-EW-C modules optical functions are
entirely passive, it is able to be placed in any available slot and will pro-

vide the necessary optical signal filtering even if electrical power to the
module is lost. Due to this passive nature, the Mean Time Between Failure
(MTBF) of the module is very high.
to and from the 1CSMU-EW-C module must be manually verified during in-
stallation or re-configuration. The optical specifications of the module
are as follows:
Table 3-9: 1CSMU-EW-C Module Optical Specifications

Express port add path insertion loss 1.0 dB
Express port drop path insertion loss 1.5 dB
Express port drop path isolation >12 dB
Directivity >50 dB

bles:
Table 3-10: 1CSMU-EW-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 1CSMU-EW-C 1CSMU-EW-C
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string

string

Table 3-10: 1CSMU-EW-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 1CSM+#Cxxxx-E/W where the value
string equipment. of Cxxxx is equal to that of the
Channel attribute.
string
Channel RE { C1470 | C1490 see comment Auto-provisioning default will
| C1510 | C1530 match the equipped module.
| C1550 | C1570
| C1590 | C1610
}
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-11: 1CSMU-EW-C EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-12: 1CSMU-EW-C EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 3-12: 1CSMU-EW-C EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.4 1CSMU-EW-D
The 1CSMU-EW-D module is DWDM version of the 1CSMU-EW-D module, in-
tended for use in ring applications where a given DWDM channel is to be
added and dropped from both sides of the ring at a Network Element. Each
half of the module contains a pair of passive optical filters providing add
and drop access to a single DWDM channel on the client port while allow-
ing all other channels to pass through the module between the network
and express ports. The 1CSMU-EW-D module exists in 80 different variants
- 1 per DWDM channel, which is always the same channel on both the East
and West halves of the module. All optical connectors are LC type. Since
the 1CSMU-EW-D modules optical functions are entirely passive, it is able
to be placed in any available slot and will provide the necessary optical

signal filtering even if electrical power to the module is lost. Due to this
passive nature, the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the module is
very high.
to and from the 1CSMU-EW-D module must be manually verified during in-
stallation or re-configuration. The optical specifications of the module
are as follows:
Table 3-13: 1CSMU-EW-D Module Optical Specifications

Express port add path insertion loss 1.3 dB
Express port drop path insertion loss 1.5 dB
Express port drop path isolation >26 dB
Passband width 250 pm
Directivity >50 dB

bles:
Table 3-14: 1CSMU-EW-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 1CSMU-EW-D 1CSMU-EW-D
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string

string

Table 3-14: 1CSMU-EW-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 1CSM+#Dxx-E/W where the value of
string equipment. Dxx is equal to that of the Channel
attribute.
string
Channel RE { D01 .. D64 | see comment Auto-provisioning default will
DC1 .. DC9 | DL1 match the equipped module.
.. DL9 }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-15: 1CSMU-EW-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-16: 1CSMU-EW-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 3-16: 1CSMU-EW-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.5 1GSMU-D
The 1GSMU-D module is a passive optical filter module providing access
to a DWDM 4 channel group on the client port while allowing all other
channels to pass through the module between the network and upgrade
ports. Each module provides support for both add and drop directions of
traffic flow. The 1GSMU-D module exists in 16 different variants - 1 per
DWDM 4 channel group. All optical connectors are LC type. Since the
1GSMU-D modules optical functions are entirely passive, it is able to be
placed in any available slot and will provide the necessary optical signal
filtering even if electrical power to the module is lost. Due to this passive
nature, the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the module is very high.
to and from the 1GSMU-D module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-17: 1GSMU-D Module Optical Specifications

Directivity >50 dB

bles:
Table 3-18: 1GSMU-D EQPT Attributes
Acces Manual Auto-

s Provisioning provisioning
Equipment Type RE 1GSMU-D 1GSMU-D

string

Table 3-18: 1GSMU-D EQPT Attributes
Acces Manual Auto-

s Provisioning provisioning
string string.
FW Package R 8 character string This value is read from the equipment.
Revision
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 1CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy where the value of
string equipment. Dxx and Dyy are equal to the upper
and lower boundary values forming
the value of the GROUP attribute.
string
Channel Group RE { D01-D04 | D05- see comment Auto-provisioning default will
D08 | D09-D12 | match the equipped module.
D13-D16 | D17-
D20 | D21-D24 |
D25-D28 | D29-
D32 | D33-D36 |
D37-D40 | D41-
D44 | D45-D48 |
D49-D52 | D53-
D56 | D57-D60 |
D61-D64 }
Admin State RW { IS | MGT | AINS AINS | MGT AINS | MGT If the SYS attribute AISPENA is set,
| MT | DSBLD } AINS will be used as the default
value for both manual creation and
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 3-19: 1GSMU-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-20: 1GSMU-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.6 2ABSM-C
The 2ABSM-C module is a passive optical filter module used to split and
combine the network port CWDM 8 channel signal between 2 client ports,
each of which consists of 4 CWDM channels. Each module provides sup-
port for both add and drop directions of traffic flow. One client port cov-
ers the “A” spectrum which consists of the 1470 nm, 1490 nm, 1590 nm
and 1610 nm CWDM signals adjacent to the C-band region. The remaining
client port covers the “B” spectrum which is sufficient to cover the DWDM
C band, thus enabling hybrid CWDM/DWDM network configurations by cas-
cading DWDM filters connected to this port.
All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 2ABSM-C modules optical
functions are entirely passive, it is able to be placed in any available slot
and will provide the necessary optical signal filtering even if electrical
power to the module is lost. Due to this passive nature, the Mean Time
Between Failure (MTBF) of the module is very high.
to and from the 2ABSM-C module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-21: 2ABSM-C Module Optical Specifications

Add/Drop port insertion loss 1.5 dB
Drop port isolation 30 dB
Directivity >50 dB

bles:
Table 3-22: 2ABSM-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Acces Provisionin provisioning
Attribute Name s Type Allowed Values g Default Default Comments
Equipment Type RE 2ABSM-C 2ABSM-C
string
string string.

Table 3-22: 2ABSM-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Acces Provisionin provisioning
Attribute Name s Type Allowed Values g Default Default Comments
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 2ABSM-#C1470-#C1610
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-23: 2ABSM-C EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-24: 2ABSM-C EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 3-24: 2ABSM-C EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.7 2BSM-D
The 2BSM-D module is a passive optical filter module splitting one DWDM
optical band into equal spectral size upper and lower sub-regions. The
module exists in 2 variants - one splitting the C-band (channels D01
through D32) into 2 sub-regions (D01 through D16 and D17 through D32)
and one splitting the L-band (channels D33 through D64) into 2 sub-re-
gions (D33 through D48 and D49 through D64). Each module provides
support for both add and drop directions of traffic flow. All optical con-
nectors are LC type. Since the 2BSM-D modules optical functions are en-
tirely passive, it is able to be placed in any available slot and will provide
the necessary optical signal filtering even if electrical power to the mod-
ule is lost. Due to this passive nature, the Mean Time Between Failure
to and from the 2BSM-D module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-25: 2BSM-D Module Optical Specifications

Directivity >50 dB

bles:
Table 3-26: 2BSM-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Access Provisionin provisioning
Attribute Name Type Allowed Values g Default Default Comments
Equipment Type RE 2BSM-D 2BSM-D
string

string string.

Table 3-26: 2BSM-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 2BSM-#D01-#D32 if BAND=C,
string equipment. 2BSM-#D33-#D64 if BAND=L.
string
OM Band RE {C|L} see comment Auto-provisioning default will
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-27: 2BSM-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-28: 2BSM-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 3-28: 2BSM-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.8 2CLSM-D
The 2CLSM-D module is a passive optical filter module used to split and
combine the client side C-band and L-band port signals between the net-
work port. Each module provides support for both add and drop directions
of traffic flow. All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 2CLSM-D mod-
ules optical functions are entirely passive, it is able to be placed in any
available slot and will provide the necessary optical signal filtering even
if electrical power to the module is lost. Due to this passive nature, the
to and from the 2CLSM-D module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-29: 2CLSM-D Module Optical Specifications

Add/Drop port insertion loss (C Band) 1.5 dB
Add/Drop port insertion loss (L Band) 1.3 dB
Directivity >50 dB

bles:
Table 3-30: 2CLSM-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Acces Provisioning provisioning
Attribute Name s Type Allowed Values Default Default Comments
Equipment Type RE 2CLSM-D 2CLSM-D
string
string string.
Revision string

Revision string

Table 3-30: 2CLSM-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 2CLSM-#D01-#D64
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-31: 2CLSM-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-32: 2CLSM-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 3-32: 2CLSM-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.9 3BSM-C
The 3BSM-C module is a passive optical filter module used to split and
combine the network port signal between 3 client ports consisting of a
1310 nm “grey” channel port, a port which covers the “A” part of the
CWDM spectrum which consists of the 1470 nm, 1490 nm, 1590 nm and
1610 nm signals, while the remaining client port covers the “B” spectrum
which is sufficient to cover the DWDM C band or the 4 remaining channels
of the 8 channel CWDM spectrum bounded by the “A” port channels. Both
directions of signal flow are supported for each port, and the module en-
ables hybrid 1310 nm overlay CWDM/DWDM network configurations.
All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 3BSM-C modules optical
to and from the 3BSM-C module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-33: 3BSM-C Module Optical Specifications

Add port insertion loss (A/B ports) 1.8 dB
Drop port insertion loss (A/B ports) 2.1 dB
Add port insertion loss (1310 nm port) 1.5 dB
Drop port insertion loss (1310 nm port) 1.7 dB
Directivity >50 dB

bles:
Table 3-34: 3BSM-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Access Allowed Provisioning provisionin

Attribute Name Type Values Default g Default Comments
Equipment Type RE 3BSM-C 3BSM-C

Table 3-34: 3BSM-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 3BSM-#G1310-#C1610
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-35: 3BSM-C EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Table 3-36: 3BSM-C EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.10 40CSM-D
The 40CSM-D module is a passive optical filter module providing bi-direc-
tional access between 40 DWDM channels on the client ports and a single
multi-wavelength network port. There are 2 variants of the module one
for the C-band and one for the L-Band. All optical connectors are LC type.
Due to the isolation performance of the filter assembly, the module may
only be used in conjunction with the 2CLSM module which provides the
C/L-band splitting and multiplexing and is intended for point-to-point
applications only.
Since the 40CSM-D modules optical functions are entirely passive, it is
able to be placed in any available slot which has sufficient space to ac-
commodate it and will provide the necessary optical signal filtering even
to and from the 40CSM-D module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-37: 40CSM-D Module Optical Specifications

Client add/drop port insertion loss 6 dB
Adjacent channel isolation >25 dB
Directivity >45 dB

bles:
Table 3-38: 40CSM-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 40CSM-D 40CSM-D
string
string string.

Manual Auto-
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 40CSM-#D02-#D32 for C-Band,
string equipment. 40CSM-#D34-#D64 for the L-Band.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-39: 40CSM-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-40: 40CSM-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Condition

3.11 4CSM-C
The 4CSM-C module is a passive optical filter module providing access be-
tween 4 CWDM channels on the client port and the network port. Each
module provides support for both add and drop directions of traffic flow
and is intended for use with the 2ABSM-C module. The 4CSM-C module ex-
ists in 2 different variants - 1 per CWDM channel sub-band (“A” or “B”).
All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 4CSM-C modules optical func-
tions are entirely passive, it is able to be placed in any available slot and
will provide the necessary optical signal filtering even if electrical power
to the module is lost. Due to this passive nature, the Mean Time Between
Failure (MTBF) of the module is very high.
to and from the 4CSM-C module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-41: 4CSM-C Module Optical Specifications
Module Property Wavelengths Specification

Add port insertion loss 1471 nm, 1511 nm 1.4 dB
1491 nm, 1531 nm 1.7 dB
1551 nm, 1591 nm 2.0 dB
1571 nm, 1611 nm 2.3 dB
Drop port insertion loss 1571 nm, 1611 nm 1.4 dB
1551 nm, 1591 nm 1.7 dB
1491 nm, 1531 nm 2.0 dB
1471 nm, 1511 nm 2.3 dB
Drop port adjacent channel isolation all channels >30 dB
Directivity >50 dB


bles:
Table 3-42: 4CSM-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4CSM-C 4CSM-C
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4CSM+#C1470-#C1610 if BAND=A,
string equipment. 4CSM-#C1510-#C1570 if BAND=B.
string
OM Band RE {A|B} see comment Auto-provisioning default will
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 3-43: 4CSM-C EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-44: 4CSM-C EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.12 4CSM-D
The 4CSM-D module is a passive optical filter module providing access be-
tween four DWDM channels, one per client port, and the network port.
flow. The 4CSM-D module exists in 16 different variants - 1 per DWDM
channel group in each of the C and L bands (8 module types per band).
All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 4CSM-D modules optical
to and from the 4CSM-D module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-45: 4CSM-D Module Optical Specifications

Add port insertion loss First client port 2.6 dB
Second client port 2.2 dB
Third client port 1.8 dB
Fourth client port 1.4 dB
Drop port insertion loss First client port 1.4 dB
Directivity >50 dB


bles:
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4CSM-D 4CSM-D
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4CSM-#Dxx-#Dyy where the value of
string equipment. Dxx and Dyy are equal to the first
and second portions of the GROUP
attribute.
string
Channel Group RE { D01-D04 | see comment Auto-provisioning default will
D05-D08 | D09- match the equipped module.
D12 | D13-D16 |
D17-D20 | D21-
D24 | D25-D28 |
D29-D32 | D33-
D36 | D37-D40 |
D41-D44 | D45-
D48 | D49-D52 |
D53-D56 | D57-
D60 | D61-D64 }

Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-47: 4CSM-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Condition


Condition

3.13 4CSMU-D
The 4CSMU-D module is a passive optical filter module providing access
between four DWDM channels, one per client port, and the network and
upgrade ports. Each module provides support for both add and drop di-
rections of traffic flow. The 4CSMU-D module exists in 16 different vari-
ants - 1 per DWDM channel group in each of the C and L bands (8 module
types per band). All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 4CSMU-D
to and from the 4CSMU-D module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-49: 4CSMU-D Module Optical Specifications

Add port insertion loss First client port 3.2 dB
Upgrade port 1.4 dB
Drop port insertion loss First client port 2.0 dB
Upgrade port 1.4 dB
Directivity >50 dB


bles:
Table 3-50: 4CSMU-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4CSMU-D 4CSMU-D
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4CSM+#Dxx-#Dyy where the value of
attribute.
string
Channel Group RE { D01-D04 | see comment Auto-provisioning default will
D12 | D13-D16 |
D17-D20 | D21-
D24 | D25-D28 |
D29-D32 | D33-
D36 | D37-D40 |
D41-D44 | D45-
D48 | D49-D52 |
D53-D56 | D57-
D60 | D61-D64 }

Table 3-50: 4CSMU-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-51: 4CSMU-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-52: 4CSMU-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 3-52: 4CSMU-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.14 4GSM-D
The 4GSM-D module is a passive optical filter module providing access be-
tween four DWDM four-channel groups, one per client port, and the net-
work port. Each module provides support for both add and drop directions
of traffic flow. The 4GSM-D module exists in 4 different variants - 1 for
each set of 4 consecutive DWDM 4 channel groups in the C and L bands.
All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 4GSM-D modules optical
to and from the 4GSM-D module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-53: 4GSM-D Module Optical Specifications

Add port insertion loss First channel group 2.6 dB
Second channel group 2.2 dB
Third channel group 1.8 dB
Fourth channel group 1.4 dB
Drop port insertion loss First channel group 1.4 dB
Directivity >50 dB
Adjacent group isolation 32 dB
Non-adjacent group isolation 40 dB


bles:
Table 3-54: 4GSM-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4GSM-D 4GSM-D
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the GCSM-#Dxx-#Dyy where the value of
attribute.
string
Subband RE { D01-D16 | see comment Auto-provisioning default will
D48 | D49-D64
}
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 3-55: 4GSM-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-56: 4GSM-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.15 8CSMU-C
The 8CSMU-C module is a double-width (2 slot wide) passive optical filter
module providing access between all eight CWDM channels, one per client
port, plus an upgrade port supporting wavelengths in the 1290 nm to
1350 nm range and the network port. Each module provides support for
both add and drop directions of traffic flow. All optical connectors are LC
type. Since the 8CSMU-C modules optical functions are entirely passive,
it is able to be placed in any available slot and will provide the necessary
optical signal filtering even if electrical power to the module is lost. Due
to this passive nature, the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the mod-
ule is very high.
to and from the 8CSMU-C module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-57: 8CSMU-C Module Optical Specifications

Directivity >50 dB
Optical return loss (Mux and Demux) >45 dB
Adjacent channel isolation (Mux and Demux) >30 dB
Maximum PMD (Mux and Demux) 0.5 ps

bles:
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 8CSMU-C 8CSMU-C
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string

Manual Auto-
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 8CSM-#C1470-#C1610
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-59: 8CSMU-C EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Condition


Condition

3.16 8GSM-D
The 8GSM-D module is a double-width (2 slot wide) passive optical filter
module providing access between all eight DWDM channel groups within
either the C or L band, one group per client port, and the network port.
flow. The 8GSM-D module exists in 2 different variants - 1 for each of the
C and L bands. All optical connectors are LC type. Since the 8GSM-D mod-
ules optical functions are entirely passive, it is able to be placed in any
available slot and will provide the necessary optical signal filtering even
to and from the 8GSM-D module must be manually verified during instal-
follows:
Table 3-61: 8GSM-D Module Optical Specifications

Add port insertion loss First channel group 3.8 dB
Fifth channel group 3.5 dB
Sixth channel group 3.0 dB
Seventh channel group 2.5 dB
Eighth channel group 2.0 dB
Drop port insertion loss First channel group 2.0 dB
Fifth channel group 2.3 dB
Sixth channel group 2.8 dB
Seventh channel group 3.3 dB
Eighth channel group 3.8 dB
Directivity >50 dB
Adjacent group isolation 32 dB
Non-adjacent group isolation 40 dB


bles:
Table 3-62: 8GSM-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Acces Allowed Provisioning provisioning
Attribute Name s Type Values Default Default Comments
Equipment Type RE 8GSM-D 8GSM-D
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 8GSM-#D01-#D32 if BAND=C,
string equipment. 8GSM-#D33-#D64 if BAND=L.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 3-63: 8GSM-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-64: 8GSM-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.17 OSFM
The OSFM module is a passive optical filter module providing access to
the 1630 nm Optical Supervisory Channel (OSC) used to provide inter-NE
communications services for Operations, Administration, Maintenance
and Provisioning features. All other optical signals pass through between
the network and upgrade ports, while the OSC signal is accessed via the
client port. Each module provides support for both add and drop direc-
tions of traffic flow. All optical connectors are LC type. Since the OSFM
to and from the OSFM module must be manually verified during installa-
tion or re-configuration. The optical specifications of the module are as
follows:
Table 3-65: OSFM Module Optical Specifications

Directivity >50 dB

bles:
Table 3-66: OSFM EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE OSFM OSFM

Table 3-66: OSFM EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the OSFM#1630
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-67: OSFM EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Table 3-68: OSFM EQPT Conditions
Condition

3.18 PSM
The PSM module is a passive optical filter module providing a 5% optical
power tap point to facilitate monitoring of an optical line signal at the
boundary of the Network Element. All optical signals pass through both
the network and add/drop monitor ports. Each module provides support
for uni-directional traffic flow. All optical connectors are LC type. Since
the PSM modules optical functions are entirely passive, it is able to be
placed in any available slot and will provide the necessary optical signal
splitting even if electrical power to the module is lost. Due to this passive
nature, the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the module is very high.
to and from the PSM module must be manually verified during installation
or re-configuration. The optical specifications of the module are as fol-
lows:
Table 3-69: PSM Module Optical Specifications

Through port insertion loss 1.1 dB
Monitor port insertion loss 15 dB
Operating wavelengths 1470 ~ 1610 nm
Optical return loss (all ports) >45 dB

bles:
Table 3-70: PSM EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE PSM PSM
string
string string.
Revision string

Revision string

Table 3-70: PSM EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the PSM
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 3-71: PSM EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 3-72: PSM EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 3-72: PSM EQPT Conditions
Condition


Chapter 4
2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S
The 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S module is a 2 port TDM (Time Division Multiplex-
ing) access multiplexer which aggregates 2 client side signals into one or
two network facilities with a rate equivalent to that of an OC48 or STM16
signal.
On the network side, the module supports one or two bi-directional ports
using SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) sub-modules. The SFPs used on
the network side determine the wavelength, transmit optical power level
and receive sensitivity levels. Both ports must be equipped during normal
operation of a network protected configuration, otherwise only one port
need be equipped.
On the client side, each of the 2 ports may support a bi-directional facility
using SFP sub-modules. On the 2TCA2G5 modules, the client side signals
are each a discrete rate signal equivalent to a 1 Gigabit Coupling Link, 1
Gigabit Fiber Channel or 1 Gigabit Ethernet, and may be configured inde-
pendently, allowing all possible combinations of these signals on the cli-
ent ports. The 2TCA2G5S module client ports each support only a
transparent 622 Mbps signal format (capable of transparently transport-
ing an OC-12 or STM-4 signal).
FW7420 F7 Vol3 2TCA2G5.fm
4.1 Equipment Provisioning

4.1.1 Module Attributes
bles:
Table 4-1: 2TCA2G5 EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 2TCA2G5 2TCA2G5
string
string string.
Revision string
FPGA Revision R 16 character This value is read from the equipment.
string
Revision string
string
string
uCM Revision R 16 character This value is read from the equipment.
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 2TCA-PCN-1G3+2G5
string equipment.
string
Transmission RE { MUXW | MUXHST MUXHST Determines which sub-modules and
Mode MUXE | facilities may be provisioned.
MUXHST } MUXE allows all client ports plus the
NE network port, MUXW allows all
client ports plus the NW network
port, MUXHST allows all ports on the
client and network sides.
Deployment RE { GENERIC | GENERIC GENERIC If set to CLIENTP, the module and
Scenario CLIENTP } its facilities may not be configured
as a member in any form of
protection group. CLIENTP is not
allowed if the Transmission Mode
parameter is MUXHST.

Table 4-1: 2TCA2G5 EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 4-2: 2TCA2G5S EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 2TCA2G5S 2TCA2G5S
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 2TCA-PCN-622M+2G5
string equipment.
string

Table 4-2: 2TCA2G5S EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
allowed if the Transmission Mode
parameter is MUXHST.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 4-3: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 4-4: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 4-4: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S EQPT Conditions
Condition
4.1.2 Plug Attributes - 2TCA2G5 Network Side

The type of network side plugs permitted on this module are SFP-C (Sec-
tion 2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24), SFP-D (Section 2.2 “SFP-D”, p. 2-26) and SFP-
G (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31). If the Rate attribute value ANY is provi-
sioned, it will be equivalent to 2G5. The set of valid plug types permitted
on the network ports are:
Table 4-5: 2TCA2G5 Network Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipmen
t Type Rate Channel Reach Supported Facility Types
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx VLONG F2488
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx LONG F2488
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx VLONG F2488
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx ULONG F2488
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 LONG F2488
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 SHORT F2488
4.1.3 Plug Attributes - 2TCA2G5S Network Side

G (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31). If the RATE attribute value ANY is pro-
visioned, the rate of the plug will not be considered as a criteria for rais-
ing an equipment mismatch condition. An SGEO-RATE condition will be

raised by the facility whenever the corresponding equipped plug type is

unable to support that facility type but no equipment mismatch condition
exists. The set of valid plug types permitted on the network ports are:
Table 4-6: 2TCA2G5S Network Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipmen
t Type Rate Channel Reach Supported Facility Types
4.1.4 Plug Attributes - Client Side

The type of client side plugs permitted on this module are SFP-C (Section
2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24) and SFP-G (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31). If the Rate
attribute value ANY is provisioned, the behavior will be to allow any of
the SFPs listed below to be equipped without raising a mismatch condi-
tion. An Data Rate Not Supported condition will be raised by the facility

whenever the corresponding equipped plug type is unable to support that
facility type but an equipment level mismatch condition does not exist.
The set of valid plug types permitted on the client ports are:
Table 4-7: 2TCA2G5 Client Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment
Type Rate Channel Reach Supported Facility Types
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx VLONG F1250, F1062
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx LONG F1250, F1062
SFP-G 4G G1310 SHORT F1062
SFP-G 4G G850 INTRA F1062
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 LONG F1250, F1062
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 SHORT F1250, F1062
SFP-G 2G1 G850 INTRA F1250, F1062
SFP-G HS G1310 SHORT F1250, F1062
SFP-G HS G850 INTRA F1250, F1062
Table 4-8: 2TCA2G5S Client Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment

4.2 2TCA2G5 Supported Facilities

Table 4-9: 2TCA2G5 Supported Facility Configurations
Client
Port(s) Network
Port(s)
Attribute Facility
Dependencies Type Supported Layers Facility Type Supported Layers
MODE=MUXW C1, CH:F1062 State, Operations, NW CH: F2488 State, Operations,
C2 or Physical, Data Coding Physical, F2488
CH:F1250 DCN: EOC State, EOC
MODE-MUXE C1, CH:F1062 State, Operations, NE CH: F2488 State, Operations,
C2 or Physical, Data Coding Physical, F2488
CH:F1250 DCN: EOC State, EOC
MODE=MUXHST C1, CH:F1062 State, Operations, NW, CH: F2488 State, Operations,
C2 or Physical, Data Coding NE Protection, Physical,
CH:F1250 F2488
NE DCN: EOC State, EOC

4.3 2TCA2G5S Supported Facilities
Table 4-10: 2TCA2G5S Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Attribute Facility
Dependencies Type Supported Layers Facility Type Supported Layers
MODE=MUXW C1, CH:F622 State, Operations, NW CH: F2488 State, Operations,
C2 Physical Physical, F2488
DCN: EOC State, EOC
MODE-MUXE C1, CH:F622 State, Operations, NE CH: F2488 State, Operations,
C2 Physical, Data Coding Physical, F2488
DCN: EOC State, EOC
MODE=MUXHST C1, CH:F622 State, Operations, NW, CH: F2488 State, Operations,
C2 Physical NE Protection, Physical,
F2488
NE DCN: EOC State, EOC

4.4 Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration

The 2TCA2G5 module TDM configuration performs time-division multi-
plexing of 2 client signals in a bit transparent manner into an F2488 net-
work side facility. Each of the client signals may be separately
provisioned as either an F1062 or an F1250 facility.
The 2TCA2G5S module TDM configuration performs time-division multi-
plexing of 2 F622 client signals in a bit transparent manner into an F2488
network side facility.
No on-board protection switching capabilities are supported in this con-
figuration - if network channel protection services are required, the con-
figuration described in Section 4.5 “Network Protected Time-Division
Multiplexer Configuration”, p. 4-116 should be used instead.
In the TDM configuration, only one of the two network side ports is used
to support a facility - any attempt to provision the other port will be de-
nied. The supported port is determined by the modules EQPT property
Transmission Mode - if the value is MUXE, the NE port and facility are sup-
ported while if the value is MUXW, the NW port and facility are supported.
In addition to those facilities modelling traffic carrying services, an em-
bedded operations channel (EOC) may also be supported by provisioning
the corresponding EOC type network facility instance.
The following sub-sections include tables which summarize the attributes
of the various facility types supported in this configuration.
4.4.1 Network Facility Properties

Table 4-11: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F2488 F2488
string string.
Protection Role R { WKG | PROTN NA NA
| NA }
Valid Signal Timer R { 00-00 .. 96- see comment see comment If created with an initial state of
00 } AINS, the value will be set to the
then current value of the SYS
attribute AISPDEFTM.
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE } ALS ALS
Channel R see comment N/A N/A Optical channel at which the facility
is operating.
Equal to the assigned channel
number of the equipment

supporting the facilities transmit
direction.

Table 4-11: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Wavelength R see comment N/A N/A A representation of the channel
number in use by the facilities
transmit direction, expressed in
nanometers..
Error Forwarding R { idle } N/A N/A
Mode
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 4-12: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Register Threshold Level

Type and
MUX CRC NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
NEND RCV 1-DAY Integer No thresholds defined.
MUX ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
MUX SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
LBCL NEND TRMT NA Decimal 3 No thresholds defined.
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-C and Rate=2G5 and Reach=LONG
Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -20.0 0 -20.0
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Optical Power NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 OPT-FLT N/A N/A Read from plug
Tx
OPT-FHT N/A N/A Read from plug
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-C and Rate=2G5 and Reach=VLONG

Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -28.0 -9.0 -28.0
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0

Table 4-12: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location Register Threshold Level
Type and
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-D and Rate=2G5 and Reach=ULONG
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-D and Rate=2G5 and Reach=VLONG
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-G and Rate=2G5 and Reach=SHORT
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Optical Power NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 OPT-FLT N/A N/A -Read from plug
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-G and Rate=2G5 and Reach=INTRA
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Table 4-13: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Conditions
Condition
OOS Tx Disabled (OFF) NEND TRMT NA NA Yes SA

Laser Forced ON NEND TRMT NA NA Yes NSA

Table 4-13: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Conditions
Condition
External/Facility loopback NEND NA NA NA Yes SA
Internal/Terminal NEND NA NA NA Yes SA
Loopback
Laser Failure NEND TRMT NA CR Yes SA
LBCL Abnormal NEND TRMT NA MN Yes NSA
Auto Shutdown (ALS) NEND TRMT NA NR Yes SA
Loss Of Signal NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Opt. Power Rx Too Low NEND RCV NA MN Yes NSA
Opt. Power Rx Too High NEND RCV NA MN Yes NSA
Opt. Power Tx Too Low NEND TRMT NA MN Yes NSA
Opt. Power Tx Too High NEND TRMT NA MN Yes NSA
MUX LOF NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
4.4.2 Network EOC Facility Properties
Table 4-14: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - EOC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE EOC N/A
string string.
Maximum ECC Bit R { 1000 } N/A N/A
rate
ECC Protection R {Y|N} N/A N/A Only the value N applies in this
configuration.

Table 4-14: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - EOC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
EOC facilities do not support any PM registers in this release.
Table 4-15: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - EOC Facility Conditions
Condition
EOC Failure NEND RCV NA MJ Yes NSA

4.4.3 Client Facility Properties
Table 4-16: 2TCA2G5 TDM Configuration - F1062/F1250 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F1062/F1250 see comment Default facility type created during
auto-provisioning is F1062 if the
plug Rate is 4G, otherwise it is
F1250.
string string.
Valid Signal R { 00-00 .. 96- see comment see comment If created with an initial state of
Timer 00 } AINS, the value will be set to the
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Error Forwarding Rw { EPC | LSROFF LSROFF
Mode LSROFF }
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | DISABLE DISABLE LSROFFDLY may be enabled only if
DISABLE } the equipment attribute Deployment
Scenario is not set to allow client
protection, and if the Error
Forwarding Mode attribute is set to
allow the laser to be turned off as a
means of propagating an error
indication downstream. If the
facility type is also F1250, the
LSROFFDLY attribute will be enabled
by default.
Disparity Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE ENABLE
Correction DISABLE }
ALS Mode Rw { NONE } NONE NONE

Table 4-16: 2TCA2G5 TDM Configuration - F1062/F1250 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 4-17: 2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F622 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F622 F622 F622
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Error Forwarding Rw { LSROFF }
Mode
ALS Mode Rw { NONE } NONE NONE
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | DISABLE DISABLE
DISABLE }

Table 4-17: 2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F622 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 4-18: 2TCA2G5 TDM Configuration - F1062/F1250 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location

Type and
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-G and Rate=4G and Reach=SHORT
Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -24.0 -1.0 -18.0 if below
Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx

Table 4-18: 2TCA2G5 TDM Configuration - F1062/F1250 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Type and
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-G and Rate=4G and Reach=INTRA
Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -19 0 -19.0 @ 1Gbps
Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-G and Rate=HS and Reach=SHORT
Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-G and Rate=HS and Reach=INTRA
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Table 4-19: 2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F622 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Table 4-20: 2TCA2G5 TDM Configuration - F1062/F1250 Facility Conditions
Condition


Table 4-20: 2TCA2G5 TDM Configuration - F1062/F1250 Facility Conditions
Condition
Loopback
Auto Shutdown (EPC) NEND TRMT NA NR Yes SA
Auto Shutdown (OFF) NEND TRMT NA NR Yes SA
Data Rate Not Supported NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Loss of Char Sync NEND NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Loss of Char Sync FEND FEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
Table 4-21: 2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F622 Facility Conditions
Condition
Loopback


Table 4-21: 2TCA2G5S TDM Configuration - F622 Facility Conditions
Condition

4.5 Network Protected Time-Division Multiplexer

Configuration
An extension of the TDM configuration is also available on the
2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S module which supports not one but two network side
facilities with protection switching capabilities, all integrated on the
module. This variant is selected by setting the modules EQPT attribute
Transmission Mode to the value MUXHST.
In this configuration, it is possible to provision both of the network side
plugs and their respective facilities, as well as a facility protection group
defining the roles of each of these facilities as either the normally work-
ing or protection member. The client side facilities all follow exactly the
same rules as in the unprotected TDM configuration. Only one EOC facility
may be provisioned, using the port value “NE” in its AID, and when used
it will be protected along with the traffic flow, so that its signal will al-
ways be associated with the ACT facility within the protection group. The
EOC facility may be provisioned when either or both of the network side
facilities are provisioned.
Certain changes in system behavior are also inherent when operating in
this configuration, and may be observed externally. These include:
• The hold off time between detection of LOS and activation of ALS
shutdown in the reverse direction on the network facilities will be 0,
instead of the normal hold off time of 250 msec.
In general, all of the properties supported by the various facility types
described above in Section 4.4 “Time-Division Multiplexer Configuration”,
p. 4-104 apply with the same values, defaults and auto-provisioning be-
havior. Therefore, to avoid repetition, only the specific properties which
are added or modified in this configuration relative to these previously
stated values will be described in the following sub-sections. Since this
configuration adds the ability to provision a protection group, all of the
properties of the protection group will be defined in the relevant sub-sec-
tion below.

Relative to the properties defined in Section 4.4.1 “Network Facility Prop-
erties”, p. 4-104 there is one difference in facility attribute values, no dif-
ferences in the Performance Monitoring register and threshold

definitions, several changes to the properties of the facility conditions
and several additional conditions due to their ability to be configured as
a member of a protection group, as indicated in the tables below:
Table 4-22: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S Protected TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-
Protection Role R { WKG | PROTN NA N/A Reflects the facilities role in the
| NA } associated protection group. The
value will be NA if the group is not
provisioned, otherwise it will reflect
the role of the facility within the
group.
Table 4-23: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S Protected TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Modified

Conditions
Condition
OOS Tx Disabled (OFF) NEND TRMT NA NA/NA Yes/No SA/NSA
Laser Failure NEND TRMT NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
Auto Shutdown (ALS) NEND TRMT NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
Loss Of Signal NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
MUX LOF NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
Table 4-24: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S Protected TDM Configuration - F2488 Additional Facility

Conditions
Condition
Auto-Switch WKG To PROTN NEND NA NA TC N/A
Auto-Switch PROTN To WKG NEND NA NA TC N/A
MAN Switch WKG TO PROTN NEND NA NA TC N/A
MAN Switch PROTN To WKG NEND NA NA TC N/A
Switch to PROTN Inhibit NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
Switch to WKG Inhibited NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
APS Protocol Failure NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
APS Config Mismatch NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA

4.5.2 Network EOC Facility Properties

All of the properties associated with the EOC facility on the network side
are identical to those defined in Section 4.4.2 “Network EOC Facility Prop-
erties”, p. 4-107 with the exception that only the NE instance is support-
ed and the PROTECT attribute will have a different fixed value as indicated
below:
Table 4-25: 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S Protected TDM Configuration - EOC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
ECC Protection R {Y|N} N/A N/A The value will be Y in this
configuration.
4.5.3 Network Protection Group Properties

The support of a network protection group on the 2TCA2G5/2TCA2G5S
module is unique to this configuration, and its attributes are summarized
in the table below. In this release, there are no Conditions or Performance
Monitoring related registers or thresholds associated with the protection
group instance (although relevant conditions do exist on the network fa-
cilities, as described above).
The protection group will be a CH type FFP, and may be created manually
via the ENT-FFP-CH command - it will not auto-provision.
Table 4-26: 2TCA2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - F2488 FFP-CH Attributes
Manual Auto-
Protection RE { PORT } N/A
Mechanism
Protection Group R { DPRING } N/A N/A
Type
Directionality R { BI } N/A N/A
Revertive R N N/A N/A

Chapter 5
2TCM2G5
The 2TCM2G5 module is a 2 port TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) access
multiplexer which aggregates 2 client side signals into one or two net-
work facilities with a rate equivalent to that of an OC48 or STM16 signal.
Unlike the similar 2TCA2G5 module, the 2TCM2G5 module does not sup-
port an embedded operations channel (EOC) nor does it offer a regenera-
tor configuration.
operation of a network protected configuration otherwise only one port
need be equipped.
using SFP sub-modules. The client side signals are each a 1 Gigabit Cou-
pling Link (which supports the signal initialization process) or a discrete
rate bit-transparent signal equivalent to a 1 Gigabit Coupling Link, 1 Gi-
gabit Fiber Channel or 1 Gigabit Ethernet. The ports may not be config-
ured independently - both ports must use the same facility type, and
attempts to provision a different type for the second client facility will
be denied.
FW7420 F7 Vol3 2TCM2G5.fm

bles:
Table 5-1: 2TCM2G5 EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 2TCM2G5 2TCM2G5
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 2TCM-PLR/HS-MCHS
string equipment.
string

Table 5-1: 2TCM2G5 EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 5-2: 2TCM2G5 EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 5-3: 2TCM2G5 EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 5-3: 2TCM2G5 EQPT Conditions
Condition
5.1.2 Plug Attributes - Network Side

sioned, it will be equivalent to 2G5. The set of valid plug types permitted
on the network ports are:
Table 5-4: 2TCM2G5 Network Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment

2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24), SFP-E (Section 2.3 “SFP-E”, p. 2-29) and SFP-G (Sec-
tion 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31). If the Rate attribute value ANY is provisioned,
the behavior will be to allow any of the SFPs listed below to be equipped
without raising a mismatch condition. An Data Rate Not Supported con-
dition will be raised by the facility whenever the corresponding equipped
plug type is unable to support that facility type but an equipment level
mismatch condition does not exist. The set of valid plug types permitted
on the client ports are:
Table 5-5: 2TCM2G5 Client Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment
SFP-C 4G Cxxxx LONG F1250, F1062
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx LONG F1250, F1062

SFP-E GBE N/A N/A F1250

Table 5-5: 2TCM2G5 Client Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment
SFP-G 4G G1310 SHORT F1062
SFP-G 4G G850 INTRA F1062
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 LONG F1250, F1062
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 SHORT F1250, F1062
SFP-G 2G1 G850 INTRA F1250, F1062
SFP-G HS G1310 SHORT F1250, F1062
SFP-G HS G850 INTRA F1250, F1062
SFP-G CL G1310 INTRA F1250, F1062, CL

5.2 2TCM2G5 Supported Facilities

Table 5-6: 2TCM2G5 Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
Attribute Dependencies Type Supported Layers Type Supported Layers
MODE=MUXE C1, CH:CL State, Operations, NE CH: F2488 State, Operations,
Client Plug RATE = CL C2 Physical Physical
MODE=MUXE C1, CH:F1062 State, Operations,

Client Plug RATE = { CL | C2 Physical
2G1 | 2G5 | HS | 4G | ANY }
MODE=MUXE C1, CH:F1250 State, Operations,
Client Plug RATE = { 2G1 | C2 Physical
2G5 | HS | GBE | ANY }
MODE=MUXW C1, CH:CL State, Operations, NW CH: F2488 State, Operations,
Client Plug RATE = CL C2 Physical Physical
MODE=MUXW C1, CH:F1062 State, Operations,

2G1 | 2G5 | HS | 4G | ANY }
MODE=MUXW C1, CH:F1250 State, Operations,
MODE=MUXHST C1, CH:CL State, Operations, NW, CH: F2488 State, Operations,
Client Plug RATE = CL C2 Physical NE Protection, Physical
MODE=MUXHST C1, CH:F1062 State, Operations,

2G1 | 2G5 | HS | 4G | ANY }
MODE=MUXHST C1, CH:F1250 State, Operations,

The 2TCM2G5 module TDM configuration performs time-division multi-
plexing of 2 client signals in a bit transparent manner into an F2488 net-
work side facility. Each of the client signals may be provisioned as either
a CL (Coupling Link), an F1062 or an F1250 facility as long as the rule
that both facilities must be of the same type is met. No on-board protec-
tion switching capabilities are supported in this configuration - if net-
work channel protection services are required, the configuration
described in Section 5.4 “Network Protected Time-Division Multiplexer Con-
figuration”, p. 5-134 should be used instead.
MODE - if the value is MUXE, the NE port and facility are supported while
if the value is MUXW, the NW port and facility are supported. The network
side facility will always operate with automatic laser safety features en-
abled in this configuration unless the plug is an SFP-G type, in which case
ALS operation is not possible.
Due to the rule that the client facilities must be of the same type on both
client ports, the auto-provisioning behavior will be that the type of the
first facility created will follow the rules described below, while the sec-

ond instance will only auto-provision if the type suggested by the plug
matches that of the existing client facility instance previously provi-
sioned.

Table 5-7: 2TCM2G5 TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
| NA }
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
ALS Mode R { ALS } N/A N/A
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 5-8: 2TCM2G5 TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Defect NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Seconds
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx

Table 5-9: 2TCM2G5 TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Conditions
Condition
Rx Clock Sync Failure NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA

Table 5-10: 2TCM2G5 TDM Configuration - F1062/F1250 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F1062/F1250 see comment Default facility type created during
auto-provisioning is F1062 if the
plug Rate is 4G, F1250 if the plug
Rate is GBE, 2G5, 2G1, or HS.
string string.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Applicable only to cases where the SFP-E plug is not used:
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Error Forwarding R { LSROFF } N/A N/A
Mode
ALS Mode R { NONE } N/A N/A

Table 5-11: 2TCM2G5 TDM Configuration - CL Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE CL see comment Default facility type created during
auto-provisioning is CL if the plug
Rate is CL.
string string.
Valid Signal Timer R { 00-00 .. 96- see see comment If created with an initial state of
00 } comment AINS, the value will be set to the
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 5-12: 2TCM2G5 TDM Configuration - CL/F1062/F1250 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Defect Seconds NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
if Plug Equipment Type is not SFP-E:
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-C and Rate=4G or 2G5 and Reach=LONG
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Optical Power NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 OPT-FLT N/A N/A -Read from
Tx plug

Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-G and Rate=CL and Reach=INTRA
Rx 622 Mbps
-19.0
otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Table 5-13: 2TCM2G5 TDM Configuration - CL/F1062/F1250 Facility Conditions
Condition


Table 5-13: 2TCM2G5 TDM Configuration - CL/F1062/F1250 Facility Conditions
Condition
OOS Rx Disabled NEND RCV NA NA Yes SA
Applicable only if the SFP-E type plug is not used:


Configuration
An extension of the TDM configuration is also available on the 2TCM2G5
module which supports not one but two network side facilities with pro-
tection switching capabilities, all integrated on the module. This variant
is selected by setting the modules EQPT attribute Transmission Mode to
the value MUXHST, which is the default mode for auto-provisioning.
ing or protection member. The network facilities in this configuration will
always perform automatic laser safety functions, regardless of the type of
SFP module used. The hold off time between detection of LOS and activa-
tion of ALS shutdown in the reverse direction on the network facilities
will be 0, instead of the normal hold off time of 250 msec. applied in oth-
er configurations. The client side facilities all follow exactly the same
rules as in the unprotected TDM configuration.
tion below.

Table 5-14: 2TCM2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-

group.

Table 5-15: 2TCM2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - F2488 Facility Modified Conditions
Condition
Rx Clock Sync Failure NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
Table 5-16: 2TCM2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - F2488 Additional Facility Conditions
Condition

The support of a network protection group on the 2TCM2G5 module is
unique to this configuration, and its attributes are summarized in the ta-
ble below. In this release, there are no Conditions or Performance Moni-
toring related registers or thresholds associated with the protection
Table 5-17: 2TCM2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - F2488 FFP-CH Attributes
Manual Auto-

Mechanism

Table 5-17: 2TCM2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - F2488 FFP-CH Attributes
Manual Auto-
Type

Chapter 6
4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D
The 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D module is a double slot width 4 port TDM
(Time Division Multiplexing) access multiplexer which aggregates 4 client
side signals in a bit-transparent manner into a single network facility. All
optical interfaces on the module - both client side and network side - are
resident within the module and therefore do not require user installation
of SFP or XFP plugs.
The network port operates as a F1250 facility using a proprietary multi-
plexing scheme. The wavelength and reach of the network port are deter-
mined by the variant of the module which is equipped, with the 4TCA1G3-
C modules containing CWDM compatible network interfaces equivalent to
SFP-C plugs of Rate=2G5 with a VLONG reach (Section 2.1 “SFP-C”,
p. 2-24), while the 4TCA1G3-D versions include DWDM compatible net-
work interfaces equivalent to SFP-D plugs of Rate=2G5 with a VLONG reach
(Section 2.2 “SFP-D”, p. 2-26).
The client side ports may be independently provisioned to support either
an F125, F155 or F200 type facility, allowing all possible combinations of
these types across the various ports. The optical specifications for the cli-
ent side ports on all variants of the module are the same, and are equiv-
alent to those of an SFP-G type plug (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31) of
Rate=CL, which implies a wavelength of 1310 nm and INTRA reach.

bles:
Table 6-1: 4TCA1G3-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4TCA1G3-C 4TCA1G3-C
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Cxxxx where Cxxxx
string equipment. is the relevant value of the
Channel attribute.
string
Transmission R { MUX } This value is read from the equipment.
Mode
Channel RE { C1470 | as read This attribute refers to the
C1490 | C1510 | from capabilities of the network port.
C1530 | C1550 | module
C1570 | C1590 |
C1610 }
Reach R { VLONG } N/A N/A This attribute refers to the
capabilities of the network port. The
equivalent property of the client

ports is not available as a
retrievable attribute value.

Table 6-1: 4TCA1G3-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 6-2: 4TCA1G3-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4TCA1G3-D 4TCA1G3-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4TCA-LS+1G3-V#Dxx where Dxx is
string equipment. the relevant value of the Channel
attribute.
string
Transmission R { MUX } This value is read from the equipment.

Mode

Table 6-2: 4TCA1G3-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Channel RE { D01 .. D64 | as read from This attribute refers to the
DC1 .. DC9 | DL1 module capabilities of the network port.
.. DL9 }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 6-3: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 6-4: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 6-4: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

6.2 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D Supported Facilities

Table 6-5: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
C1 CH:F125 | State, Operations, N CH:F1250 State, Operations,
CH:F155 | Physical Physical
CH:F200
C2 CH:F125 | State, Operations,
CH:F155 | Physical
CH:F200
CH:F155 | Physical
CH:F200
CH:F155 | Physical
CH:F200

6.3 Multiplexer Configuration
The 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D module multiplexer configuration is used to
combine up to 4 client signals into a single F1250 network side facility.
The multiplexing does not perform any sort of traffic policing or rate lim-
iting functions, so all client signals mapped into the network side facility
will experience complete transfer of their payloads. The network side fa-
cility will always operate with automatic laser safety features enabled.


Table 6-6: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D Multiplexer Configuration - F1250 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 6-7: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D Multiplexer Configuration - F1250 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Seconds

Table 6-7: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D Multiplexer Configuration - F1250 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
For 4TCA1G3-D Modules Only:
LBCN NEND TRMT NA 0 .. 200 LBCN-FHT N/A N/A Read
from
module.
Laser TEMP NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 LSRTEMP-FHT N/A N/A Read
from
module.
Table 6-8: 4TCA1G3-D Multiplexer Configuration - F1250 Facility Conditions
Condition
Loopback
For 4TCA1G3-D Modules Only:
LBCN Too High NEND TRMT NA MN Yes NSA
Laser TEMP Too High NEND TRMT NA MN Yes NSA


Table 6-9: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D Multiplexer Configuration - F155/F200 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F155/F200 F200
string string.
Channel R G1310 N/A N/A Optical channel at which the facility
is operating.
direction.
Wavelength R 1310.00 N/A N/A A representation of the channel
nanometers..
Mode
DISABLE }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Manual Auto-

Facility Type RE F125 N/A

Manual Auto-
string string.
Channel R G1310 N/A N/A Optical channel at which the
facility is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE N/A
DISABLE }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 6-11: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D Multiplexer Configuration - F125/F155/F200 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Seconds

Table 6-12: 4TCA1G3-C/4TCA1G3-D Multiplexer Configuration - F125/F155/F200 Facility

Conditions
Condition

Chapter 7
4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D
The 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D module is offered with CWDM or DWDM integrat-
ed network side optical interfaces. Both variants are able to operate in
multiple modes and configurations, including a 4 port multiplexer with a
special case which acts as a 2 port multiplexer, a single bi-directional port
transponder operating at a discrete rate, or as a uni-directional regener-
ator for a discrete rate signal. While the module supports different signal
types and rates on the client and network ports, it always operates at a
discrete rate consistent with the facility types provisioned - it does not
support dynamically rate-adaptive behavior.
The network side optical interface is inherent in the choice of a specific
module instance - it does not support a user changeable pluggable mod-
ule. In all cases except those exceptions noted below the network port
will perform automatic laser shutdown in the event of a loss of optical
signal on the receive port, to ensure laser safety requirements are met.
When configured as a uni-directional regenerator, the module will not
permit the client side plugs or associated facilities to be provisioned.
Note that automatic laser safety operation is not supported in the uni-
directional regenerator configuration.
If the module is provisioned as Transmission Mode=TRANS and has De-
ployment Scenario=through, the module will emulate the behavior of an
in-line 3R regenerator. This configuration will also disable the automat-
ic laser safety function on the network ports.
The client side supports up to 4 pluggable modules which may be of var-
ious types with each port being independently configured. There are,
however, limitations on the allowable types of pluggable modules which
may be equipped, depending upon module provisioning, as explained in
Section 7.1.2 “Plug Attributes - Client Side”, p. 7-153 below.
FW7420 F7 Vol3 4TCA4G-x.fm

bles:
Table 7-1: 4TCA4G-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4TCA4G-C 4TCA4G-C
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Cxxxx or 4TCA-
string equipment. PC-4GU+4G-L#Cxxxx where Cxxxx is
the relevant value of the Channel
attribute.
string
Channel RE { C1470 | C1490 see comment During auto-provisioning the value
| C1510 | C1530 | matching the inserted module will
C1550 | C1570 | be used.
C1590 | C1610 }
Reach RE { VLONG | LONG } see comment During auto-provisioning the value
matching the inserted module will
be used.
Transmission RE { MUX | MUX
Mode REGEN1WAY |
TRANS }

Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Only supported if operating as a transponder:
Deployment RE { GENERIC | GENERIC GENERIC Deployment scenario.
Scenario THRU }
Table 7-2: 4TCA4G-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Attribute Access Provisioning provisioning
Name Type Allowed Values Default Default Comments
Equipment Type RE 4TCA4G-D 4TCA4G-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4TCA-PC-4GU+4G-V#Dxx where Dxx
string equipment. is the relevant value of the

Channel attribute.
string

Manual Auto-
Attribute Access Provisioning provisioning
Name Type Allowed Values Default Default Comments
Channel RE { D01 .. D64 | see comment During auto-provisioning the value
DC1 .. DC9 | DL1 matching the inserted module will
.. DL9 } be used.
Reach R { VLONG } N/A N/A Read from the module.
Transmission RE { MUX | MUX
Mode REGEN1WAY |
TRANS }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Only supported if operating as a transponder:
Deployment RE { GENERIC | GENERIC GENERIC Deployment scenario.
Scenario THRU }
Table 7-3: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 7-4: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Condition

2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24), SFP-E (Section 2.3 “SFP-E”, p. 2-29) and SFP-G (Sec-
tion 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31). When configured to operate as a transponder
in pass-through mode, SFP-D (Section 2.2 “SFP-D”, p. 2-26) type plugs
may also be used. If the Rate attribute value ANY is provisioned, the rate
of the plug will not be considered as a criteria for raising an equipment
mismatch condition. An Data Rate Not Supported condition will be raised
by the facility whenever the corresponding equipped plug type is unable
to support that facility type but no equipment mismatch condition exists.
The facility types supported in the various configurations and their de-
pendence upon the type of the SFP pluggable module varies depending
upon the configuration of the module. Please see the relevant configura-
tion section for a summary of the supported plugs and corresponding fa-
cilities types supported in each configuration.

7.2 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Supported Facilities

Table 7-5: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
MODE=MUX and C1, CH:FC State, Operations, N CH:F4250 State, Operations,
RATE={HS | CL | 2G1 | 2G5 C2, Physical Physical
| 4G | ANY} C3,
C4
MODE=MUX and C1, CH:1GBE State, Operations, N CH:F4250 State, Operations,
RATE={HS | CL | 2G1 | 2G5 C2, Physical Physical
| GBE | ANY} C3,
C4
MODE=MUX and C1, Not usable in this configuration. N CH:F4250 State, Operations,
RATE={CL | 2G1 | 2G5 | 4G C2 Physical
| ANY} C3, CH:2GFC State, Operations,
C4 Physical
MODE=TRANS and C1, Not usable in this configuration. N CH:F1062 State, Operations,
RATE={HS | CL | 2G1 | 2G5 C2, Physical
| 4G | ANY} C3
C4 CH:F1062 State, Operations,
Physical
RATE={CL | 2G1 | 2G5 | 4G C2, Physical
| ANY} C3
Physical
RATE={4G | ANY} C2, Physical
C3
Physical
MODE=REGEN1WAY C1, Not usable in this configuration. CH:F1062 State, Operations,
C2, Physical
C3,
C4
C2, Physical
C3,
C4
C2, Physical
C3,
C4

7.3 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration
In the 4-Port Multiplexer configuration, the 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D modules
are able to combine up to 4 client signals into a single F4250 network
side facility. The multiplexing does not perform any sort of traffic polic-
ing or rate limiting functions, so all client signals mapped into the net-
work side facility will experience complete transfer of their payloads. This
mode is achieved by provisioning the module to operate with Transmis-
sion Mode=MUX.
All of the ports used in this configuration must be of the same facility
type. Therefore, whenever the first facility on the client side is provi-
sioned, it will determine the type of all of the remaining client facilities
which may be successfully provisioned. Attempts to provision a facility of
a different type, even if that type is one of those otherwise supported by
the module, will be denied. There is a further limitation in the case that
the client facilities are used to support 2GFC facilities, since in this case
it is possible for only 2 of the 4 ports to be utilized. In this case, the 2GFC
facilities must be provisioned on ports 3 and 4, and ports 1 and 2 may
not have a facility provisioned (attempts to do so will be denied). The
possible client facility combinations in this configuration are thus limited
to 4 ports of 1GBE, 4 ports of FC, or 2 ports of 2GFC. In all cases, the net-
work side facility type is limited to F4250.
Table 7-6: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Client Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment
SFP-C 4G Cxxxx Long FC, 2GFC
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx VLong 1GBE, FC, 2GFC
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx Long 1GBE, FC, 2GFC
SFP-G 4G G1310 SHORT FC, 2GFC
SFP-G G850 INTRA
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 LONG 1GBE, FC, 2GFC
SFP-G G1310 SHORT
SFP-G 2G1 G850 INTRA 1GBE, FC, 2GFC
SFP-G HS G1310 SHORT FC, 1GBE
SFP-G G850 INTRA
SFP-G CL G1310 INTRA 1GBE, FC, 2GFC
SFP-E GbE Not Applicable Not Applicable 1GBE


Table 7-7: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - F4250 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
Valid Signal Timer R { 00-00 .. 96- see comment see If created with an initial state of
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
ALS Mode Rw { NONE | ALS }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 7-8: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - F4250 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Rx
OPR-HT -26.0 -10.0 -10.0

Table 7-8: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - F4250 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Optical Power NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 No thresholds defined.
Tx
For 4TCA4G-D Modules Only
from
module.
Table 7-9: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - F4250 Conditions
Condition
For 4TCA4G-D Modules Only


Table 7-10: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - 1GBE Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 1GBE 1GBE Default facility type created during
auto-provisioning when the first
plug to initiate auto-provisioning is
of Rate CL, HS, 2G1 or 2G5.
string string.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE ENABLE
DISABLE }

Table 7-11: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - 1GBE Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Seconds
if Plug Equipment Type is not SFP-E:
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0

Table 7-11: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - 1GBE Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx 622 Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Table 7-12: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - FC/2GFC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE FC/2GFC FC Default facility type created during
of Rate 4G.
string string.
is operating.
direction.

nanometers..

Table 7-12: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - FC/2GFC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Mode
DISABLE }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 7-13: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - FC Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Seconds
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-C and Rate=4G and Reach=LONG
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx 622 Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Table 7-14: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - 2GFC Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Seconds
Optical NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -20.0 0 -20.0
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Optical NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 OPT-FLT N/A N/A Read from plug
Power Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Power Tx
Optical NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -28.0 -9.0 -28.0
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Optical NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -24.0 -1.0 -18.0 if below
Power Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0
Power Tx
Optical NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -19 0 -19.0 @ 1Gbps
Power Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx 622 Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Table 7-15: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - 1GBE/FC/2GFC Facility

Conditions
Condition
Applicable only if the SFP-E type plug is not used:


Table 7-15: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D 4-Port Multiplexer Configuration - 1GBE/FC/2GFC Facility

Conditions
Condition

7.4 Transponder Configuration
The 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D modules are also able to operate as a transpon-
der for a single client side facility operating on port 4 when the module
is configured with Transmission Mode=TRANS. In this configuration, both
the client and network side facilities must be of the same type, although
a variety of facility types are possible. All of the facility choices available
will operate at a fixed rate - adaptive rate behavior is not supported by
this module.
The facility types supported in this configuration are rate specific but not
format aware, and so, they differ from those supported on the client ports
in the multiplexer configuration although they have a correspondence, as
follows:
Rate & Format

Specific Facility Type Rate Specific Facility
(Supported in Type
Multiplexer (Supported in this
configuration) configuration)
FC F1062
2GFC F2125
Note that the 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D modules do not support a transponder

configuration for a 1GBE facility or the corresponding rate specific F1250
facility type. The types of client-network facility pairs supported by this
configuration are 2xF1062, 2xF2125 and 2xF4250.
The difference between how a format aware signal format such as FC is
handled versus the equivalent rate specific but not format aware facility
such as an F1062 are handled by the module is as follows:
• format aware signals may have idle frames inserted in the
information stream to adjust for rate differences between the client
and network ports, while the signals which are not format aware will
be passed through bit-for-bit transparently
• format aware signals may have conditioning signals inserted in
various failure scenarios, as defined by the relevant standards, while
the signals which are not format aware will not (they typically
employ laser shutdown as an alternate means of signal conditioning
downstream of a failure)
While the 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D offers a uni-directional regenerator con-
figuration, the transponder configuration is able to achieve a bi-direc-
tional form of signal regeneration as well. If the 4TCA4G-C is used with
an SFP-C type pluggable on port 4, it is possible to regenerate a CWDM
signal, while the 4TCA4G-D may be used with an SFP-D type pluggable on
port 4 to regenerate a DWDM signal. Since the client and network side
ports may operate using either the same or different wavelengths, it is

possible to regenerate a signal at the same wavelength, regenerate a sig-
nal and convert its wavelength, and even to bridge CWDM and DWDM do-

mains by employing a pluggable module of the appropriate type opposite

that of the network ports properties (i.e. a 4TCA4G-C using an SFP-D or a
4TCA4G-D using an SFP-C).
Table 7-16: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Client Side Supported Plugs and
Facilities
Equipment
SFP-G 4G G1310 SHORT F1062, F2125, F4250
SFP-G G850 INTRA
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 LONG F1062, F2125
SFP-G G1310 SHORT
SFP-G 2G1 G850 INTRA F1062, F2125
SFP-G HS G1310 SHORT F1062
SFP-G G850 INTRA
SFP-G CL G1310 INTRA F1062, F2125
Allowed only if Deployment Scenario=THRU
SFP-C 4G Cxxxx LONG F1062, F2125, F4250
SFP-C Cxxxx VLONG
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx VLONG F1062, F2125
SFP-D Dxx LONG
7.4.1 F4250/F2125 Facility Pair Properties

Table 7-17: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Transponder Configuration - F4250/F2125 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F4250/F2125 see comment An F4250 type facility will be
created if auto-provisioning is
initiated by insertion of a plug of
Rate=4G.
string string.

Table 7-17: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Transponder Configuration - F4250/F2125 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
Admin State RW { IS | MGT | AINS | MGT DISABLE If the SYS attribute AISPENA is set,
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
For Network Side facilities:
ALS Mode Rw { NONE | ALS } Not present if the supporting
equipment is provisioned so that
MODE
For Client Side facilities:
ALS Mode R { NONE } N/A N/A Not present if the supporting
MODE
Table 7-18: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Transponder Configuration - F4250 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Seconds
Rx
OPR-HT -26.0 -10.0 -10.0

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Tx
For 4TCA4G-D Module Network Facilities Only
LBCN NEND TRMT NA 0 .. 200 LBCN-FHT N/A N/A Read from
module.
For Client Facilities Only
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Tx
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Seconds

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
module.
Rx
OPR-HT -26.0 -10.0 -10.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Tx
Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx 622 Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Table 7-20: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Transponder Configuration - F4250/F2125 Conditions
Condition


Table 7-20: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Transponder Configuration - F4250/F2125 Conditions
Condition
For Network Facilities Only

7.4.2 F1062 Facility Pair Properties

Table 7-21: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Transponder Configuration - F1062 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F1062 F1062 Default facility type created during
of Rate CL, HS, 2G1 or 2G5.
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
For Network Side facilities:
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE } Not present if the supporting
MODE
For Client Side facilities:
ALS Mode R { NONE } N/A N/A Not present if the supporting

MODE

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Type and
Seconds
module.
Rx
OPR-HT -26.0 -10.0 -10.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Type and
Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Type and
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -19.0 -3.0-3 -27.0 if below
Rx 622 Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Table 7-23: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Transponder Configuration - F1062 Conditions
Condition
For Network Facilities Only


Table 7-23: 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D Transponder Configuration - F1062 Conditions
Condition

7.5 Uni-directional Regenerator Configuration
When the module is provisioned with Transmission Mode = REGEN1WAY,
the 4TCA4G-C/4TCA4G-D module will operate as a uni-directional signal
regenerator for one of the facility types supported by the Transponder
configuration, namely for an F1062, an F2125 or an F4250 facility in-
stance. The regenerator configuration employs only the receive and trans-
mit network ports to perform the uni-directional regeneration of the
signal. Any attempts to provision the client side equipment ports or as-
sociated facilities will be denied in this configuration, although it is still
possible to query the inventory attributes of any pluggable modules in-
serted in those positions.
The set of attributes, PM registers and thresholds, and conditions for the
facility types supported in this configuration are identical to those de-
scribed above in Section 7.4 “Transponder Configuration”, p. 7-167, with
the following exceptions:
• there is no auto-provisioning default for the facility type - the type
of signal to be regenerated must be manually provisioned
• the F1062 facility ALS Mode property will be NONE in this mode
• since there are no client side facility instances in this mode, none of
the PM or Condition related properties listed for such facility
instances will apply in this configuration


Chapter 8
4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D
The 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D module is a double slot width 4
port TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) multiplexer which aggregates up to
4 client side OC48 or STM16 or OTU1 signals using asynchronous mapping
into an OTU2 network signal. Each of the clients is transported transpar-
ently through the OTN of which the OTU2 is a member. Since the local
clock reference on board the module provides a ±20 ppm quality timing
reference, the client signals are transported with no impact to their own
respective timings, allowing them to be used as timing references within
the client signal networks.
The network side supports a single bi-directional port using an integrated
optical interface. The wavelength and reach of the network port are de-
termined by the variant of the module which is equipped. The 4TCC10G-C
modules contain a CWDM compatible network interface with a VLONG
reach, while the 4TCC10G-D versions include a DWDM compatible network
interface with a VLONG reach. The 4TCC10GT-D modules include a tunable
wavelength laser with a VLONG reach supporting the network interface.
using SFP sub-modules. These modules, and the associated facilities may
be user configured in any possible combination of the supported facility
types.

bles:
Table 8-1: 4TCC10G-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4TCC10G-C 4TCC10G-C
FW7420 F7 Vol3 4TCC10G.fm
string
string string.
Table 8-1: 4TCC10G-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Cxxxx where
string equipment. Cxxxx is the relevant value of the
Channel attribute.
string
Transmission RE { MUX } MUX MUX
Mode
Reach RE { VLONG } VLONG VLONG
protection group.
Channel RE { C1530 | as read from This attribute refers to the
C1550 | C1570 | module capabilities of the network port.
C1590 }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 8-2: 4TCC10G-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4TCC10G-D 4TCC10G-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#Dxx where Dxx
string equipment. is the relevant value of the Channel
attribute.
string
Mode
protection group.
.. DL9 }

Table 8-2: 4TCC10G-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 8-3: 4TCC10GT-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Access Provisioni provisioning
Attribute Name Type Allowed Values ng Default Default Comments
Equipment Type RE 4TCC10GT-D 4TCC10GT-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4TCC-PC-2G7+10G-V#D01-32
string equipment.
string
Mode

Table 8-3: 4TCC10GT-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Access Provisioni provisioning
Attribute Name Type Allowed Values ng Default Default Comments
protection group.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 8-4: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 8-5: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 8-5: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

attribute value ANY is provisioned it will be equivalent to the value 2G5,
since this is the only supported rate. The set of valid plug types permitted
Table 8-6: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Client Side Supported
Plugs
Equipment Supported
Type Rate Channel Reach Facility Types
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx VLONG OC48, STM16, OTU1
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx LONG OC48, STM16, OTU1
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 LONG OC48, STM16, OTU1
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 SHORT OC48, STM16, OTU1

8.2 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Supported
Facilities
Table 8-7: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Attribute Facility Facility
Dependencies Type Supported Layers Type Supported Layers
(Client) C1 CH:OC48 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
TERM=SECTION Physical, OC48 Section Physical, OTU2, TCMi,
ODU2, OPU2
DCN:SDCC State DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
CH:ODU1 State, ODU1, OPU1
(Client) TERM=PHYS C1 CH:OC48 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
Physical Physical, OTU2, TCMi,
ODU2, OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
(Client) C1 CH:STM16 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
TERM=SECTION Physical, STM16 Physical, OTU2, TCMi,
Section ODU2, OPU2
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
(Client) TERM=PHYS C1 CH:STM16 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
ODU2, OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
(Client) TERM=OTU C1 CH:OTU1 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
Physical, OTU1, TCMi, Physical, OTU2, TCMi,
ODU1 ODU2, OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State DCN:GCC0 | State

GCC1 | GCC2 GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
CH:ODU1 State, ODU1

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
ODU2, OPU2
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
ODU2, OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
Section ODU2, OPU2
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
ODU2, OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
ODU1 ODU2, OPU2

| GCC2
CH:ODU1 State, ODU1

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
ODU2, OPU2
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
ODU2, OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
Section ODU2, OPU2
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
ODU2, OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
ODU1 ODU2, OPU2

| GCC2
CH:ODU1 State, ODU1

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
ODU2, OPU2
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
ODU2, OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
Section ODU2, OPU2
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
ODU2, OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
ODU1 ODU2, OPU2

| GCC2
CH:ODU1 State, ODU1

The 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D module provides time-division
multiplexing services using an asynchronous mapping to carry each of up
to 4 client signals within an OTU2 network facility.
When OC48 or STM16 client signals are mapped, the corresponding ODU1
and OPU1 layers are modelled as ODU1 facility instances which are logi-
cally associated with the network side. When an OTU1 client signal is
transported, it is also modelled as an ODU1 facility instance associated
with the network side, but in this case the ODU1 layer provides only in-
termediate monitoring access while the OPU1 layer attributes are not ac-
cessible. Each client signal has a fixed mapping relationship into one of
the 4 ODU1 facilities, and the type of each client signal is independent
of the other client signal types.
The OTU2 facility models not only the OTU2 layer of the OTN model, but
also the ODU2 and the corresponding TCM layers as well as the OPU2 layer.
A pictorial view of the facilities and their relationships is shown in Figure
8-1, p. 8-192.
Although the ODU1 facilities are logically contained within the OTU2 net-
work facility, their creation is related to the existence of their corre-
sponding client side facilities. When the latter of both the network
facility and a given client facility is created, the corresponding ODU1 fa-
cility may be created. A client facility may not be deleted until its asso-
ciated ODU1 facility has first been deleted, since the ODU1 facility also
models the implicit cross-connection relationship between the client fa-
cility and the assigned network bandwidth. Since it is logically associated
with the OTU2 facility, the OTU2 facility may not be placed manually out
of service unless all of the ODU1 facilities are first manually placed out of
service, and it may not be deleted until all of the ODU1 facilities have
been deleted. The ODU1 facilities may not be placed in-service unless the
OTU2 facility is also in-service.
During auto-provisioning, the ODU1 facility corresponding to a client fa-
cility which is auto-provisioned will also be auto-provisioned. If a client
facility is entered manually, the ODU1 facility corresponding to it must
also be entered manually, and may not be entered until the containing
network facility is first created.
In addition to those facilities modelling traffic carrying services, data
communication network channels (DCN facilities) may also be supported
in certain cases. If the client facility is section layer terminated (i.e. has
an attribute value assignment of Termination Level=SECTION), a Section
Data Communications Channel (SDCC) may be provisioned. If the client

Client Side Facilities ODU1 Facilities
CH-x-y-C1 VCH-x-y-1
(OC48 or STM16 or
OTU1)
Network Side
Facilities
CH-x-y-C2 VCH-x-y-2
(OC48 or STM16 or
OTU1)
CH-x-y-N
(OTU2)
CH-x-y-C3 VCH-x-y-3
(OC48 or STM16 or
OTU1)
Note: “x” is the shelf number and “y”

is the slot position of the 4TCC10G-
C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D module.
CH-x-y-C4 VCH-x-y-4
(OC48 or STM16 or
OTU1)
Fig. 8-1: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Time-Division Multiplexer Facilities


facility is an OTU1, it may have one of either an associated GCC0, GCC0S,
GCC1 or GCC2 facility provisioned. The OTU2 facility may have one of ei-
ther an associated GCC0, GCC0S, GCC1 or GCC2 facility provisioned.

Table 8-8: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - OTU2 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OTU2 OTU2
string string.
Protection Role R { WKG | PROTN | NA NA
NA }
nanometers..
Forward Error Rw { GFEC | GFEC GFEC
Correction EFEC-1 |
NOFEC }
Stuffing R Y N/A N/A
Error Forwarding R { AIS } N/A N/A
Mode
ALS Mode Rw { NONE | ALS } ALS ALS NONE applies only if the DWDM
optical channel is within the C-
Band.
TCM-A Activation Rw { TCM1 | DSBLD DSBLD
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }
TCM-B Activation Rw { TCM1 | DSBLD DSBLD
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }

Manual Auto-
TCM-C Activation Rw { TCM1 | DSBLD DSBLD
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }
Termination R { OPU } N/A N/A
Level
Highest R { OPU } N/A N/A
Monitoring Level
OTU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
OTU SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
ODU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
ODU SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
TCM-A BBE Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Signal Degrade
TCM-A SD Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Integer. Period
TCM-B BBE Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Signal Degrade
TCM-B SD Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Integer. Period
TCM-C BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
TCM-C SD Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Integer. Period
ODU SAPI Trace Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Expected string
OTU SAPI Trace Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Expected string
TCMA SAPI Trace Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Expected string
TCMB SAPI Trace Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Expected string
TCMC SAPI Trace Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Expected string
ODU-DAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string

Manual Auto-
OTU-DAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string
TCMA-DAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string
TCMB-DAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string
TCMC-DAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string
ODU-OPSP Rx R 32 character N/A N/A
Trace string
OTU-OPSP Rx R 32 character N/A N/A
Trace string
TCMA-OPSP Rx R 32 character N/A N/A
Trace string
TCMB-OPSP Rx R 32 character N/A N/A
Trace string
TCMC-OPSP Rx R 32 character N/A N/A
Trace string
ODU-SAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string
OTU-SAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string
TCMA-SAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string
TCMB-SAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string
TCMC-SAPI Rx R 15 character N/A N/A
Trace string
ODU-DAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
OTU-DAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
TCMA-DAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
TCMB-DAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
TCMC-DAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
ODU-OPSP Tx Rw 32 character Null string Null string
Trace string
OTU-OPSP Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string

Manual Auto-
TCMA-OPSP Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
TCMB-OPSP Tx Rw 32 character Null string Null string
Trace string
TCMC-OPSP Tx Rw 32 character Null string Null string
Trace string
ODU-SAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
OTU-SAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
TCMA-SAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
TCMB-SAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
TCMC-SAPI Tx Rw 15 character Null string Null string
Trace string
ODU TIM Mode Rw { DSBLD | DSBLD DSBLD
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
OTU TIM Mode Rw { DSBLD | DSBLD DSBLD
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
OTU TIM TCMA Rw { DSBLD | DSBLD DSBLD
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
OTU TIM TCMB Rw { DSBLD | DSBLD DSBLD
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
OTU TIM TCMC Rw { DSBLD | DSBLD DSBLD
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Applies to 4TCC10G-C and 4TCC10G-D modules only:

Manual Auto-
is operating.
direction.
Applies to 4TCC10GT-D modules only:
Channel Rw { NIG | D01 .. NIG NIG DWDM channel of the network side
D32 | DC1 .. port (provisioned).
DC9 } NIG indicates that the channel has
not yet been assigned and therefore
the laser will be switched off.
Table 8-9: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - OTU2 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location

PM Type and
Register Range Name Min Max Default
OTU FEC ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
OTU FEC NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
SES
FEC NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Corrected
Errors
FEC UBE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
OTU ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
OTU SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
OTU BBE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
OTU UAS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
ODU ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.


Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
PM Type and
ODU SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
ODU BBE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
ODU UAS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-A ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-A SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-A BBE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-A UAS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-B ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-B SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-B BBE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-B UAS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-C ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-C SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-C BBE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-C UAS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Power Rx
OPR-HT -22.0 -8.0 -8.0
Laser TEMP NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 LSRTEMP-FLT N/A N/A Read from module.
LSRTEMP-FHT N/A N/A Read from module.

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
PM Type and
LBCN NEND TRMT NA 0 .. 200 LBCN-FHT N/A N/A Read from module.
Table 8-10: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - OTU2 Facility Conditions
Condition
Internal/Terminal Loopback NEND NA NA NA Yes SA
OTU LOF NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
OTU LOM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
OTU AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
OTU BDI FEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA
OTU TIM NEND RCV NA MN Yes NSA
OTU Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ Yes SA
TCM-A AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-A OCI NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-A Locked NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-A Loss of TConn NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA
TCM-A Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ Yes SA

TCM-A BDI FEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA

Condition
TCM-A TIM NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA/NSAa
TCM-B AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-B OCI NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-B Locked NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-B Loss of TConn NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA
TCM-B Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ Yes SA
TCM-B BDI FEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA
TCM-B TIM NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA/NSAb
TCM-C AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-C OCI NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-C Locked NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-C Loss of TConn NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA
TCM-C Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ Yes SA
TCM-C BDI FEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA
TCM-C TIM NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA/NSAc
ODU AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
ODU OCI NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
ODU Locked NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
ODU BDI FEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA
ODU Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ Yes SA
ODU TIM NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA/NSA
OPU MSIM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
OPU PLM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
For 4TCC10G-C and 4TCC10G-D modules only:
Laser TEMP Too Low NEND TRMT NA MN Yes NSA
a. If the TIMMODE-TCMA attribute is DSBLD this condition is deemed non-service affecting, otherwise it is deemed poten-
tially service affecting.
b. If the TIMMODE-TCMB attribute is DSBLD this condition is deemed non-service affecting, otherwise it is deemed poten-
c. If the TIMMODE-TCMC attribute is DSBLD this condition is deemed non-service affecting, otherwise it is deemed poten-

8.3.2 Network DCN Facility Properties
Table 8-11: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - GCC0 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE GCC0 N/A
string string.
rate
ECC Protection R {Y|N} N/A N/A Will always be N in this
configuration.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 8-12: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - GCCS0 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE GCC0S N/A
string string.
rate
configuration.


Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Manual Auto-
string
rate
configuration.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
The GCC0, GCC0S, GCC1 and GCC2 facilities do not support any PM registers
or thresholds in this release.
Table 8-15: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - GCC0/GCC0S/GCC1/GCC2

Facility Conditions
Condition

8.3.3 ODU1 Facility Properties

ODU1 virtual facilities are logically contained within the network side fa-
cility and have a cross connection association to a client facility. Since
they are logically contained within the network facility, such facilities
cannot exist until the network facility supporting them exists, and they
also force the network facility to follow the normal behavioral rules for
state values of entities which logically contain other entities, so that:
• all of the ODU1 facilities must be manually out-of-service (OOS-MA)
before the network facility may be placed OOS-MA,
• all of the ODU1 facilities must be manually out-of-service for
maintenance (OOS-MA, MT) before the network facility may be OOS-
MA, MT,
• all of the ODU1 facilities must be manually out-of-service disabled
(OOS-MA, DSBLD) before the network facility may be OOS-MA,
DSBLD, and
• all of the ODU1 facilities must be deleted before the network facility
may be deleted.
The ODU1 facility provides termination of the ODU1 and OPU1 layers when
the associated client signal is either an OC48 or an STM16 type facility,
although access to the TCMi layers on this side is not permitted. When
the client side facility is of the OTU1 type, the ODU1 facility provides the
following monitoring and termination functions for the various layers:
• the ODU overhead (exclusive of the TCMi - see below) is monitored,
• if a TCMi layer is terminated on the client facility, the corresponding
TCMi overhead on the ODU1 side will contain default values and be
unused in the add (towards the network side) direction and will be
ignored in the drop (towards the client side) direction,
• the ODU1 conditions, including trace, may be monitored in the drop
(towards the client side) direction but insertion of the ODU trace
value is not permitted. SInce the ODU1 layer is being monitored, not
terminated, insertion of AIS conditioning in the drop direction will
NOT be performed, even if a monitored condition is detected. If the
trace mode is not set to disabled, and a trace mismatch is detected,
this means that insertion of AIS will not occur.
• the OPU1 layer is neither terminated nor monitored.
Table 8-16: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - ODU1 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE ODU1 ODU1 Auto-provisioned whenever the
latter of the network facility and
the associated client facility are
provisioned, regardless of whether

the system auto-provisioning
feature is enabled.

Manual Auto-
string string.
Termination Level R { SECTION | N/A N/A
OPU |
NONE }
Highest R { ODU } N/A N/A
Monitoring Level
ODU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
Period
Expected string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Present only if client facility is an OC48 or an STM16:
Trace string

Trace string

Manual Auto-
Trace string
Table 8-17: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - ODU1 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 8-18: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - ODU1 Facility Conditions
Condition
Auto Shutdown (ODU-AIS) NEND TRMT NA NR Yes SA
ODU LOF/LOM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
ODU TIM NEND RCV NA MNa Yes SA/NSAb
ODU Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ/NRc Yes SA
Supported only if the client is an OC48 or an STM16 type facility:

Table 8-18: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - ODU1 Facility Conditions
Condition
OPU AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
Auto Shutdown (OPU-AIS) NEND TRMT NA NR Yes SA
Sec/RS LOF NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
a. If the TIMMODE-ODU attribute is DSBLD this condition is not reported and is deemed non-service affecting, otherwise
it is deemed potentially service affecting.
b. If the TIMMODE-ODU attribute is DSBLD this condition is not reported and is deemed non-service affecting, otherwise
c. If the client is an OTU1 facility, this layer is monitored only, and the NR property applies.


Table 8-19: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - OC48 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OC48 OC48 Will auto-provision if the SYS
attribute SIGDEF=SONET.
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Termination Level RE { SECTION | PHYS PHYS
PHYS }
Highest R { LINE } N/A N/A
Monitoring Level
ALS Mode Rw { SDH-ALS | NONE NONE
NONE }
Error Forwarding Rw { AIS | LSROFF AIS AIS LSROFF means that the laser in the
Mode } downstream direction will be
switched off if the incoming signal
fails.
Line BER Signal Rw {5|6|7|8| 6 6
Degrade 9}
Sec/RS Trace Rw 62 character Null string Null string
Expected string
Sec/RS Rx Trace R 62 character N/A N/A
string
Section TIM Mode Rw { DSBLD | DSBLD DSBLD
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Sec/RS Trace Rw { 1BYTE | 16CRC7 16CRC7

Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }

Table 8-19: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - OC48 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Supported unless Termination Level = PHYS:
Sec/RS Tx Trace Rw 62 character Null string Null string
string
Table 8-20: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - STM16 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE STM16 STM16 Will auto-provision if the SYS
attribute SIGDEF=SDH.
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Termination Level RE { SECTION | PHYS PHYS
PHYS }
Highest R { LINE } N/A N/A

Monitoring Level
NONE }

Table 8-20: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - STM16 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
fails.
MS Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 30 30
Degrade
MS SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
Expected string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
string
Table 8-21: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Sec/RS CV NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.


Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Sec/RS ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Sec/RS SEFS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
S SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Line/MS CV NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Line/MS ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Line/MS SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Line/MS UAS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Table 8-22: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility

Conditions
Condition
Loopback

Table 8-22: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility
Conditions
Condition
Sec/RS TIM NEND RCV NA MN Yes NSA
Auto Shutdown (L-AIS) NEND TRMT NA NR Yes SA
Line/MS AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
Line/MS RDI FEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA
Line/MS Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ Yes SA
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OTU1 OTU1
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..

Manual Auto-
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }
NONE }
fails.
Termination Level RE { OTU } OTU OTU
Monitoring Level
OTU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
Period
ODU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
Period
SDHT-TCMA Rw 1 .. 100 15 15
SDPER-TCMA Rw 2 .. 10 7 7
SDHT-TCMB Rw 1 .. 100 15 15
SDPER-TCMB Rw 2 .. 10 7 7
SDHT-TCMC Rw 1 .. 100 15 15
SDPER-TCMC Rw 2 .. 10 7 7

Manual Auto-
Expected string
Expected string
Expected string
Expected string
Expected string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string

Manual Auto-
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
OTU-SAPI Tx Trace Rw 15 character Null string Null string
string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }

Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
ES-TCMA NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
1-DAY 0 .. 86400 No thresholds defined.

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
SES-TCMA NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
BBE-TCMA NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
UAS-TCMA NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
ES-TCMB NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
SES-TCMB NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
BBE-TCMB NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
UAS-TCMB NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
ES-TCMC NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
SES-TCMC NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
BBE-TCMC NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
UAS-TCMC NEND RCV 15-MIN 0 .. 900 No thresholds defined.
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0
Power Tx
Optical NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -19 0 -19.0 @ 1Gbps
Power Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Condition


Condition

TCM-C AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-C OCI NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA

Condition
TCM-C Locked NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
TCM-C Loss of TConn NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA
TCM-C Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ Yes SA
TCM-C BDI FEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA
8.3.5 Client DCN Facility Properties

The type of the DCN facilities is dependant upon the supporting client fa-
cility type. In the case of OC48 and STM16 client facilities, an SDCC DCN
facility may be supported. If the client facility is an OTU1 type, then one
of a GCC0, GCC0S, GCC1 or GCC2 facility type may be configured. The de-
tailed properties associated with each type are shown below.
Table 8-26: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - SDCC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE SDCC N/A
string string.

rate
ECC Protection R {Y|N} N/A N/A

Table 8-26: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - SDCC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
SDCC facilities do not support any PM registers in this release
Table 8-27: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - SDCC Facility Conditions
Condition
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.

Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.

Manual Auto-
creation and auto-provisioning,
otherwise OOS will be used as the
default value in both cases. The
mappings to target states in the
GR-1093-CORE model are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 8-32: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D TDM Configuration - GCC0/GCC0S/GCC1/GCC2

Facility Conditions
Condition

8.4 Dual Card Network Protected Time-Division

Multiplexer Configuration
It is also possible to use two 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D modules
in combination with either 1PM or 2PM modules in order to form a pro-
tection group providing redundancy of not only the optical path on the
network side, but also the paired modules themselves. This configuration
is only possible if both of the modules to be operated as a protected pair
have their Deployment Scenario attribute set to the value GENERIC. Gen-
eral rules applicable to this type of protection mechanism are described
in Section 1.4 “Dual-Card Protection Configurations”, p. 1-7.
One 1PM module is able to provide the necessary support for this config-
uration on one of the client ports, while one 2PM module is able to sup-
port 2 of the client ports. Depending upon the number of client ports
which are used, an appropriate number of 1PM and/or 2PM modules must
be equipped and correctly cabled. A diagram showing the cabling ar-
rangements for port 4 of the paired modules for both the 1PM and 2PM
module cases is shown in Figure 8-2, p. 8-227.
This configuration supports a facility protection group (i.e. an FFP-CH) on
the 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D module network facilities defin-
ing the roles of these facilities as either the normally working or protec-
tion member. The provisioning of the module equipment type and of the
network side facility type on each of the protection group members must
be and remain the same - this rule is verified and enforced by the system
software.
The facilities obey some added rules which did not apply to the unpro-
tected TDM configuration, namely:
• Corresponding client side facilities must be of the same type (i.e.
both OC48 or both STM16 or both OTU1). Therefore, the second such
facility to be created must be of the same type as the first.
• The DCN facilities associated with each client side facility may be
provisioned independently, however, only the one on the active side
will provide the communication to the client NE. To ensure robust
communications, both DCN facilities of the pair should be
provisioned and linked to PPPIP terminations so that layer 3
restoration may be utilized to provide communications to the client
NE regardless of which module is the active member at any time.
Since only the active member carries the DCN communication, the
facility in use will change due to both manual and automatic
protection switching actions.
• The GCC facilities on the network side of the paired modules may be
provisioned independently. Only a GCC facility associated with a
non-failed network facility is able to provide communication
services, so if only one such facility is provisioned, data
communications may not be affected by a manual switch, but will be
affected by an automatic switch. For robust communications, the

GCC facilities associated with each of the network facilities should
be provisioned.

To Client NE
From Client NE
West Module Connections using the 1PM module East Module
To Client NE
From Client NE
Connections using part 1 of the 2PM module

Fig. 8-2: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Dual Card Network Protected Configuration Cabling
In addition to these rules, which are enforced by the system, there are
also some recommended practices which will reduce the probability of ad-
verse system behavior. These practices are:
• The provisioning of signal degrade criteria (i.e. SDHT-OTU and
SDPER-OTU, SDHT-ODU and SDPER-ODU, SDHT-TCMA and SDPER-TCMA
if TCMA≠DSBLD, or SDHT-TCMB and SDPER-TCMB if TCMB≠DSBLD)

should be consistent between the two facilities to avoid possible
protection switching oscillation conditions from arising.


shutdown in the reverse direction will be 0, instead of the normal
hold off time of 250 msec.
tion below.

Table 8-33: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Protected TDM Configuration - OTU2 Facility

Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-
group.

Modified Conditions
Condition
OOS Rx Disabled NEND RCV NA NA/NA Yes/No SA/NSA


Modified Conditions
Condition
OTU LOF NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
OTU LOM NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
OTU AIS NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
OTU Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-A AIS NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-A OCI NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-A Locked NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-A Loss of TConn NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-A Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-A TIM NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSAa
TCM-B AIS NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-B OCI NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-B Locked NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-B Loss of TConn NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-B Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-B TIM NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSAb
TCM-C AIS NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C OCI NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C Locked NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C Loss of TConn NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C TIM NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSAc
ODU AIS NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
ODU OCI NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
ODU Locked NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
ODU Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
ODU TIM NEND RCV NA MN/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
OPU MSIM NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
OPU PLM NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA

Table 8-35: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Protected TDM Configuration - OTU2 Additional

Facility Conditions
Condition
Internal Link Failure NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA

All of the properties associated with the GCCx facilities on the network
side are identical to those defined in Section 8.3.2 “Network DCN Facility
Properties”, p. 8-201 with the exception that the ECC Protection attribute
will have a different fixed value as indicated below:
Table 8-36: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Protected TDM Configuration - GCCx Facility

Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-
configuration.

8.4.3 ODU1 Facility Properties
Since each of the network facilities terminates independent ODU1 and
OPU1 paths, several of the supported conditions on these facilities have
their behavior modified due to the effects of the protection configura-
tion, as follows:
Table 8-37: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Protected TDM Configuration - ODU1 Facility

Modified Conditions
Condition
Auto Shutdown (ODU-AIS) NEND TRMT NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
ODU LOF/LOM NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
ODU TIM NEND RCV NA MN/NRa Yes/No SA/NSAb
ODU Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ/NRc Yes/No SA/NSA
Supported only if the client is an OC48 or an STM16 type facility:

OPU AIS NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
Auto Shutdown (OPU-AIS) NEND TRMT NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
Sec/RS LOF NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
a. If the TIMMODE-ODU attribute is DSBLD this condition is not reported and is deemed non-service affecting, otherwise
b. If the TIMMODE-ODU attribute is DSBLD this condition is not reported and is deemed non-service affecting, otherwise
c. If the client is an OTU1 facility, this layer is monitored only, and the NR property applies.

Since each of the client facilities on the paired modules terminates the
signal independently, several of the supported conditions on these facil-
ities have their behavior modified due to the effects of the protection
configuration, as follows:
Table 8-38: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Protected TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16

Facility Modified Conditions
Condition


Table 8-38: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Protected TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16

Facility Modified Conditions
Condition
Auto Shutdown (ALS) NEND TRMT NA NA/NA Yes/No SA/NSA
Auto Shutdown (OFF) NEND TRMT NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
Auto Shutdown (L-AIS) NEND TRMT NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
Line/MS AIS NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
Line/MS Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ/MN Yes/No SA/NSA

Modified Conditions
Condition
Auto Shutdown (ALS) NEND TRMT NA NA/NA Yes/No SA/NSA


Modified Conditions
Condition
TCM-C AIS NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C OCI NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C Locked NEND RCV NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C Loss of TConn NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ/MN Yes/No SA/NSA

signal independently, the following attribute value behavior is changed
as follows:
Table 8-40: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Protected TDM Configuration - Client DCN Facility

Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-
ECC Protection R {Y|N} N/A N/A Will always be Y in this
configuration.


The support of a network protection group involving the 4TCC10G-
C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D module is unique to this configuration, and its
attributes are summarized in the table below. In this release, there are
no Conditions or Performance Monitoring related registers or thresholds
associated with the protection group instance (although relevant condi-
tions do exist on the network facilities, as described above).
Table 8-41: 4TCC10G-C/4TCC10G-D/4TCC10GT-D Protected TDM Configuration - OTU2 FFP-CH

Attributes
Manual Auto-
Maintenance R { SNC-N-PM } N/A N/A
Switching
Protection RE { CARD }
Mechanism
Type This page intentionally left blank
Switch Trigger On RW { ENABLE | DISABLE N/A
SD DISABLE }
APS Hold-Off RW {NONE | 20 | NONE N/A
100 | 200 | .. |
10000}

Chapter 9
4TCC2G5
The 4TCC2G5 module is a 4 port TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) multi-
plexer which aggregates up to 4 client side signals into an OC48 or STM16
network side format using GFP (Generic Framing Protocol) mappings. The
module is able to perform both Framed and Transparent mode GFP map-
pings including combinations thereof. The Transparent mode offers the
ability to map a client facility at line speed while the Framed mode pro-
vides the ability to police the traffic and limit the maximum and guaran-
teed transfer rates. Both of the GFP mapping modes employ VCAT (Virtual
Concatenation) features to combine multiple paths within the network
side into a logical higher-rate bundle.
operation of a network protected configuration or for the dual regenera-
tor configuration supported by the module, otherwise only one port need
be equipped.
be user configured in any configuration other than the regenerator mode;
in the regenerator mode, none of the client side ports need be equipped,
and none of them will permit the provisioning of the sub-module or as-
sociated facilities.

bles:
Table 9-1: 4TCC2G5 EQPT Attributes

FW7420 F7 Vol3 4TCC2G5.fm
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 4TCC2G5 4TCC2G5
Manual Auto-
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 4TCC-PCN-2G1U+2G5
string equipment.
string
Transmission RE { MUXW | MUXE MUXHST MUXHST Determines which sub-modules and
Mode | facilities may be provisioned.
MUXHST | MUXE allows all client ports plus the
REGEN1WAY } NE network port, MUXW allows all
client and network sides, while
REGEN1WAY allows only the NE and
NW ports to be provisioned.
allowed if the MODE parameter is
either MUXHST or REGEN1WAY.

Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 9-2: 4TCC2G5 EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 9-3: 4TCC2G5 EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 9-3: 4TCC2G5 EQPT Conditions
Condition

G (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31). The Rate attribute value ANY is equiva-
lent to the value 2G5 since this is the only rate of plug supported. The
set of valid plug types permitted on the network ports are:
Table 9-4: 4TCC2G5 Network Side Supported Plugs
Equipment
Type Rate Channel Reach
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx VLONG
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx LONG
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx VLONG
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx ULONG
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 LONG
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 SHORT

attribute value ANY is provisioned, the rate of the plug will not be con-
sidered as a criteria for raising an equipment mismatch condition. An
Data Rate Not Supported condition will be raised by the facility whenever
the corresponding equipped plug type is unable to support that facility
type but no equipment mismatch condition exists. The set of valid plug
types permitted on the client ports are:
Table 9-5: 4TCC2G5 Client Side Supported Plugs
Equipment Supported
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx VLONG 1GBE, FC, 2GFC
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx LONG 1GBE, FC, 2GFC

SFP-G 2G5 G1310 SHORT 1GBE, FC, 2GFC

Table 9-5: 4TCC2G5 Client Side Supported Plugs
Equipment Supported
SFP-G HS G1310 SHORT 1GBE, FC
SFP-G HS G850 INTRA 1GBE, FC

9.2 4TCC2G5 Supported Facilities

Table 9-6: 4TCC2G5 Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
MODE=MUXW, C1 CH:1GBE State, Operations, NW CH:OC48 State, Operations,
Client facility Physical, Data Coding Physical, OC48 Section,
FLOWCTRL=PAUSE OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
CH:GFPF State, GFPF STS1:STS1 State, STS-1 Path
Client facility Physical, Data Codinga Physical, OC48 Section,
FLOWCTRL=NONE OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
CH:GFPT State, GFPT STS1:STS1 State, STS-1 Path
MODE=MUXW C1 CH:FC State, Operations, NW CH:OC48 State, Operations,
Physical, Data Coding Physical
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
Physical, Data Coding Physical, OC48 Section,
OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXW C4 CH:FC | State, Operations, NW CH:OC48 State, Operations,
CH:2GFC Physical, Data Coding Physical, OC48 Section,
OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
MODE=MUXW, C1 CH:1GBE State, Operations, NW CH:STM16 State, Operations,
Client facility Physical, Data Coding Physical, STM16 RS,
FLOWCTRL=PAUSE STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
CH:GFPF State, GFPF VC3:VC3 State, VC-3 Path
or or
VC4:VC4 State, VC-4 Path
Client facility Physical, Data Codinga Physical, STM16 RS,
FLOWCTRL=NONE STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
CH:GFPT State, GFPT VC4:VC4 State, VC-4 Path
MODE=MUXW C1 CH:FC State, Operations, NW CH:STM16 State, Operations,
Physical, Data Coding Physical, STM16 RS,
STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
or or
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
or or
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
or or

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXW C4 CH:FC | State, Operations, NW CH:STM16 State, Operations,
CH:2GFC Physical, Data Coding Physical, STM16 RS,
STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXE, C1 CH:1GBE State, Operations, NE CH:OC48 State, Operations,
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXE C1 CH:FC State, Operations, NE CH:OC48 State, Operations,
OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Client facility Physical, Data Codingaa Physical, OC48 Section,
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXE C4 CH:FC | State, Operations, NE CH:OC48 State, Operations,
CH:2GFC Physical, Data Coding Physical, OC48 Section,
OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXE, C1 CH:1GBE State, Operations, NE CH:STM16 State, Operations,
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
or or
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXE C1 CH:FC State, Operations, NE CH:STM16 State, Operations,
STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
or or
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
or or
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
or or
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXE C4 CH:FC | State, Operations, NE CH:STM16 State, Operations,
CH:2GFC Physical, Data Coding Physical, STM16 RS,
STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXHST, C1 CH:1GBE State, Operations, NW CH:OC48 State, Operations,
Client facility Physical, Data Coding , Physical, OC48 Section,
FLOWCTRL=PAUSE NE OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
Client facility Physical, Data Codinga , Physical, OC48 Section,
FLOWCTRL=NONE NE OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
MODE=MUXHST C1 CH:FC State, Operations, NW CH:OC48 State, Operations,
Physical, Data Coding , Physical, OC48 Section,
NE OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
NE OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
NE OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXHST C4 CH:FC | State, Operations, NW CH:OC48 State, Operations,
CH:2GFC Physical, Data Coding , Physical, OC48 Section,
NE OC48 Line
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXHST, C1 CH:1GBE State, Operations, NW CH:STM16 State, Operations,
Client facility Physical, Data Coding , Physical, STM16 RS,
FLOWCTRL=PAUSE NE STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
or or
Client facility Physical, Data Codinga , Physical, STM16 RS,
FLOWCTRL=NONE NE STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
MODE=MUXHST C1 CH:FC State, Operations, NW CH:STM16 State, Operations,
Physical, Data Coding , Physical, STM16 RS,
NE STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
or or
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
NE STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
or or

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
NE STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
or or
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
MODE=MUXHST C4 CH:FC | State, Operations, NW CH:STM16 State, Operations,
CH:2GFC Physical, Data Coding , Physical, STM16 RS,
NE STM16 MS
DCN:SDCC State
N DCN:LDCC State
MODE=REGEN1WAY C1 Not usable in this configuration. NW CH:STM16 State, Operations,
, , Physical, STM16 RS
C2 NE
,
C3
,
C4

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
MODE=REGEN1WAY C1 Not usable in this configuration. NW CH:OC48 State, Operations,
, , Physical, OC48 Section
C2 NE
,
C3
,
C4
a. Only the CV, ES and DE related attributes are counted in this case, although the remaining registers will exist with zero
values.


The 4TCC2G5 module is able to provide time-division multiplexing servic-
es taking up to 4 client signals and mapping them using the Generic
Framing Protocol (GFP) into Virtually Concatenated (VCAT) bundles of
paths within either a SONET OC48 or an SDH STM16 network facility. No
on-board protection switching capabilities are supported in this configu-
ration - if network channel protection services are required, the configu-
ration described in Section 9.4 “Network Protected Time-Division
Multiplexer Configuration”, p. 9-282 should be used instead.
Each of the client signals may be separately provisioned and will use ei-
ther the Framed (GFPF) or Transparent (GFPT) GFP mapping methods, se-
lected by the choice of facility type. For 1GBE type client facilities, either
the GFPF or GFPT methods may be used. FC and 2GFC client signals must
always use the GFPT method, and the creation of a GFP facility corre-
sponding to such a client facility will only be allowed if the facility is of
this type. Because the type of the GFP facility instance depends upon
both the client facility type and the network facility existence, both of
these facilities must exist before a GFP facility instance may be created.
In the case of the GFP Framed mapping (GFPF) a traffic policing function
is provided to limit the data transfer rate according to the committed in-
formation rate (CIR) value provisioned. The GFPF mapping method there-
fore allows a line rate inequality to exist between the network facility and
the collection of client facilities - the aggregate line rate of the client
signals may exceed that of the network facility and the policing function
may be used to provision the allocation of the network side bandwidth
among the clients.
The Transparent mode of GFP mapping (GFPT) is used to support a line-
rate transfer application for one or more client ports. In the GFPT map-
ping mode, there is no provisioned CIR property, since no policing is per-

formed and the maximum line capacity of the client is transported. If
there is insufficient capacity on the network facility to carry the client
line signal, provisioning of the GFPT facility will be denied.
In this release, it is not permitted to change the members of a VCAT bun-
dle - the entire GFP facility forming the bundle must be deleted and re-
entered with a new list of path members if such a change is to be per-
formed.
Client ports 1, 2 and 3 may each support either a 1GBE or a FC facility.
Client port 4 may also support either a 1GBE or FC facility, or it may be
used to support a 2GFC facility.
Transmission Mode - if the value is MUXE, the NE port and facility are sup-
ported while if the value is MUXW, the NW port and facility are supported.
The GFPF, GFPT and path layer facilities are logically associated with the
network side facility, and the GFPF/GFPT facilities are numerically associ-
ated with their corresponding client side facilities by equality of the nu-
meric component of their final AID value elements. A pictorial view of the
modules facilities and their relationships is shown in Figure 9-1, p. 9-256.
In the figure, the type of the Path facilities depends upon both the type
of the network side facility and the type of the corresponding GFPF or
GFPT mapping which includes them in its VCAT bundle. All of the paths
within a given GFPF or GFPT VCAT bundle must be of the same type.
In the case of an STM16 network facility, it is possible that some of the
GFP mappings may use VC3 paths while others use VC4 paths - in this
case, each VC3 path entity will also have an associated VC4 path entity
associated with it, modelling the higher order path layer, with 3 VC3s be-
ing associated with each such VC4. When a VC4 is used as a member of a
VCAT bundle, the VC3 entities are not created, and no other GFP mapping
may use them as a member of their VCAT bundle. When any one VC3 within
a VC4 is used by a VCAT bundle, the VC4 entity will also exist and each
VC3 within it may be independently used by any of the GFP VCAT map-
pings, although each VC3 may be used only by one mapping, and the con-
taining VC4 itself may not be used by any mapping.
When a path is not a member of a GFP VCAT mapping, the path entity will
not exist, with the exception of a VC4 path which will exist if at least one
of the contained VC3s is a member of a VCAT mapping. Whenever a pre-

Path Facilities
STS1-x-y-{1..48} or VC3-x-y-{1..16}-
Client Side Facilities GFPF/GFPT Facilities or VC4-x-y-{1..16}
CH-x-y-C1 VCH-x-y-1
(1GBE or FC) (GFPF or GFPT)
Network Side
Facilities
CH-x-y-C2 VCH-x-y-2
CH-x-y-NE if
MUXE
CH-x-y-NW if
MUXW
CH-x-y-C3 VCH-x-y-3
CH-x-y-C4 VCH-x-y-4
(1GBE or FC or 2GFC2.) (GFPF or GFPT)
Notes:
1. “x” is the shelf number and “y” is the slot position of the 4TCC2G5 module.
2. Only GFPT is allowed for the 2GFC client facility type.
Fig. 9-1: 4TCC2G5 Time-Division Multiplexer Facilities


viously unused path is added as a member of a VCAT mapping bundle, the
path instance will be automatically created, including the containing
VC4(s) in the case of references to VC3(s), if needed.
The supported combinations of network facility type, GFP facility type
with VCG Type attribute value and corresponding path types is summa-
rized in Table 9-7, 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - Facility Type and Value De-
pendencies, p. 9-257.
As mentioned earlier, the GFPT mapping provides a line rate transfer ca-
pability for the client signal as a payload within the network facility.
Since the client signal line rate must be fully supported by the assigned
VCAT bundle, the Bundle VC List attribute of the GFPT facility instance
must list a pre-determined number of VCAT members. The relationship be-
tween the various facility types depicted in Figure 9-1, p. 9-256 showing
the various attribute value dependencies which exist, including the num-
ber of path instances required for the various GFPT mappings, is summa-
rized in Table 9-7, 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - Facility Type and Value
Dependencies, p. 9-257.
Table 9-7: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - Facility Type and Value Dependencies
Client Facility Type & GFP Facility Type and Path Facility Type and Network Facility Type and
Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes
1GBE GFPF STS1 OC48
Flow Control=PAUSE VCG Type=STS1 (maximum of 21 instances)
1GBE GFPT STS1 OC48
Flow Control=NONE VCG Type=STS1 (22 Instances)a
Bundle VC List contains 22
AIDs
FC GFPT STS1 OC48
VCG Type=STS1 (19 Instances)
AIDs
2GFC GFPT STS1 OC48
VCG Type=STS1 (38 Instances)
AIDs
1GBE GFPF VC3 STM16
VCG Type=VC3 (maximum of 21 instances.
VC4 for each VC3 used will
also be created if not
already in existence.)
1GBE GFPF VC4 STM16
Flow Control=PAUSE VCG Type=VC4 (maximum of 7 instances)
1GBE GFPT VC4 STM16
Flow Control=NONE VCG Type=VC4 (7 Instances) b

AIDs

Table 9-7: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - Facility Type and Value Dependencies
Client Facility Type & GFP Facility Type and Path Facility Type and Network Facility Type and
Attributes Attributes Attributes Attributes
FC GFPT VC4 STM16
VCG Type=VC4 (6 Instances)
AIDs
2GFC GFPT VC4 STM16
VCG Type=VC4 (12 Instances)
AIDs
a. In this case, facility instance 1 will auto-provision if and only if STS-1’s numbers 1 through 22 may be used to form the
bundle while facility instance 2 will auto-provision if and only if STS-1s numbers 23 through 44 may be used to form the
bundle.
b. In this case, facility instance 1 will auto-provision if and only if VC-4’s numbers 1 through 7 may be used to form the
bundle while facility instance 2 will auto-provision if and only if VC-4s numbers 8 through 14 may be used to form the bundle.

In addition to those facilities modelling traffic carrying services, a data
communication network channel (DCN facility) may also be supported by
the network facility. In this configuration, either a Section Data Commu-
nications Channel (SDCC) or a Line Data Communications Channel (LDCC)
may be provisioned.

Table 9-8: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - OC48 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OC48 OC48 Will auto-provision if the SYS
attribute SIGDEF=SONET.
string string.
Protection Role R { WKG | NA NA
PROTN | NA }
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Termination Level RE { PATH | PHYS N/A N/A This configuration will always show
} the value PATH.
Highest R { LINE | PATH N/A N/A This configuration will always show
Monitoring Level } the value PATH.
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE ALS ALS If a CWDM, Grey or DWDM C-Band
} plug is used, then both values are
supported and ALS is the default,
otherwise only ALS is valid and is
the default.
Line BER Signal Rw {5|6|7|8 6 6
Degrade |9}

Expected string
string

Table 9-8: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - OC48 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 9-9: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - STM16 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE STM16 STM16 Will auto-provision if the SYS
attribute SIGDEF=SDH.
string string.
Protection Role R { WKG | NA NA
PROTN | NA }
is operating.
direction.

Table 9-9: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - STM16 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
nanometers..
Termination Level RE { PATH | PHYS N/A N/A This configuration will always show
} the value PATH.
Highest R { LINE | PATH N/A N/A This configuration will always show
Monitoring Level } the value PATH.
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE ALS ALS If a CWDM, Grey or DWDM C-Band
} plug is used, then both values are
the default.
MS Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 30 30
Degrade
MS SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
Expected string
string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 9-10: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx

Table 9-10: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Table 9-11: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility Conditions
Condition


Table 9-11: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility Conditions
Condition
Only one type of DCN facility may be provisioned on the network side at
any one time.
Table 9-12: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - LDCC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE LDCC N/A N/A
string string.
rate
ECC Protection R {Y|N} N/A N/A Only the value N applies in this
configuration.

Table 9-12: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - LDCC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 9-13: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - SDCC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE SDCC N/A N/A
string string.
rate
ECC Protection R N N/A N/A
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
SDCC and LDCC facilities do not support any PM registers in this release

Table 9-14: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - LDCC/SDCC Facility Conditions
Condition
9.3.3 Path Facility Properties

Table 9-15: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - STS1 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type R STS1 N/A STS1 This facility type will auto-provision
when a reference to it is added to a
GFP facility instance BUNDLE
attribute.
Virtual Channel R { VCH AID N/A AID of Instances are created automatically
AID value } Referencing when a valid reference is made by
GFP Facility including the AID of the facility in a
BUNDLE attribute of a GFP facility
instance.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
STS1 facilities do not support any PM registers in this release.


Table 9-16: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - STS1 Facility Conditions
Condition
Path LOM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path SQM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
Path LOP NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path UNEQ NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path PLM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path RDI NEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA
Table 9-17: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - VC3 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type R VC3 N/A VC3 This facility type will auto-provision
attribute.
Virtual Channel R { VCH AID value N/A AID of Instances are created automatically
AID } Referencing when a valid reference is made by
instance.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

VC3 facilities do not support any PM registers in this release.
Table 9-18: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - VC3 Facility Conditions
Condition
LO-Path LOP NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
LO-Path SQM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
LO-Path AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
LO-Path LOP NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
LO-Path UNEQ NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
LO-Path PLM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
LO-Path RDI NEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA
Manual Auto-
Facility Type R VC4 N/A VC4 This facility type will auto-provision
attribute.
Virtual Channel R { VCH AID value N/A AID of Instances are created automatically
AID } Referencing when a valid reference is made by
instance.

Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
VC4 facilities do not support any PM registers in this release.
Table 9-20: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - VC4 Facility Conditions
Condition
Path LOM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path SQM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path AIS NEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
Path LOP NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path UNEQ NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path PLM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
Path RDI NEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA

9.3.4 GFP Facility Properties

Table 9-21: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - GFPF Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE GFPF N/A
string string.
VCG Type RE { STS1 | STS1 or none N/A If the network facility type is OC48,
VC3 | only STS1 is valid and becomes the
VC4 } default, otherwise there is no
default for manual entry.
CIR Rw { 0 .. 1000 } 1000 N/A
Bundle VC List RE { Ordered list of N/A The number of AIDs specified in the
AID values } list must conform to the values
shown in Table 9-7, p. 9-257.
AIDs must be specified in ascending
value order, although they need not
be contiguous.
This attribute may not be modified
after the facility is created.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 9-22: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - GFPF Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
C-HEC Frames NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.

Corrected

Table 9-22: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - GFPF Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
tHEC Frames NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Corrected
Discarded
Table 9-23: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - GFPT Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE GFPT GFPT Auto-provisioning will use GFPT
mappings. Only client facilities on
ports 1 and 2 will auto provision -
ports 3 and 4 will never auto
provision a facility instance.
string string.
VCG Type RE { STS1 | see comment see comment If the network facility type is OC48
VC4 } the only valid value is STS1,
otherwise it is VC4.
The use of VC3s is not allowed for
GFPT mappings.

Table 9-23: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - GFPT Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Bundle VC List RE { Ordered list see comment The number of AIDs specified in the
of AID values } list must conform to the values
shown in Table 9-7, p. 9-257.
AIDs must be specified in ascending
value order, although they need not
be contiguous.
This attribute may not be modified
after the facility is created.
Auto-provisioning defaults as fol-

lows depending upon the GFPT
instance number:
• instance 1 maps a 1GBE on client
port 1 to STS1 paths 1 through
22 if the network facility is an
OC48 or VC4 paths 1 through 7 if
the network facility is an STM16,
• instance 2 maps a 1GBE on client
port 2 to STS1 paths 23 through
44 if the network facility is an
OC48 or VC4 paths 8 through 14
if the network facility is an
STM16,
• instances 3 and 4 corresponding
to client ports 3 and 4 do not
auto-provision.
If any of the paths listed for the
above mappings are already
assigned prior to the auto-provi-
sioning operation, the facility will
not auto-provision.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 9-24: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - GFPT Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
C-HEC Frames NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Corrected
Corrected
Discarded
Super Blocks NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Discarded
Table 9-25: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - GFPF/GFPT Facility Conditions
Condition
GFP LOF NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
GFP PLM NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
GFP Client Signal Loss FEND RCV NA NR Yes SA
Loss of Char Sync FEND FEND RCV NA NR Yes SA


Table 9-26: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - 1GBE Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 1GBE 1GBE Default facility type created during
auto-provisioning on ports 1 and 2
(ports 3 and 4 do not auto-provision
facilities).
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Error Forwarding Rw { EPC | LSROFF LSROFF
Mode LSROFF }
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE ENABLE Delay before turning laser off as an
DISABLE } error forwarding indication. Must
be disabled if error forwarding is not
set to employ laser shutdown or if
the supporting equipment is
deployed in client protection
modes. Only exists if the equipment
MODE is not TRANS or REGEN.
Flow Control RE { NONE | PAUSE NONE NONE If NONE is chosen, GFPT mapping
} will be used, while if PAUSE is
chosen, GFPF mapping will be used.

Table 9-26: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - 1GBE Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 9-27: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - 1GBE Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx Framesa NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.

PAUSE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Frames
Receiveda.
Rx CRC NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Errorsa. NEND RCV 1-DAY Integer No thresholds defined.
Rx Bytesa. NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.

Frames NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Discardeda. NEND RCV 1-DAY Integer No thresholds defined.
Tx Framesa. NEND TRMT 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.

NEND TRMT 1-DAY Integer No thresholds defined.
PAUSE NEND TRMT 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Frames
Transmitteda.
Egress CRC NEND TRMT 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Errorsa. NEND TRMT 1-DAY Integer No thresholds defined.
Tx Bytesa. NEND TRMT 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.


Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
PCS ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
PCS CV NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
PCS DE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
a. Collection of counts for this attribute is not supported when the GFPT mapping is used to transport the facility, and
therefore the counter value shall always be zero in such cases.
Table 9-28: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - FC/2GFC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE FC/2GFC N/A

string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Error Forwarding Rw { EPC | LSROFF N/A
Mode LSROFF }

Table 9-28: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - FC/2GFC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | DISABLE N/A Delay before turning laser off as an
deployed in client protection
modes. Only exists if the equipment
MODE is not TRANS or REGEN.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 9-29: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - FC Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx

Table 9-29: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - FC Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Table 9-30: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - 2GFC Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Table 9-31: 4TCC2G5 TDM Configuration - 1GBE/FC/2GFC Facility Conditions
Condition
Loss of Char Sync NEND NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA
2GFC Facility Only:


Configuration
An extension of the TDM configuration is also available on the 4TCC2G5
module which supports not one but two network side facilities with pro-
tection switching capabilities, all integrated on the module. This variant
is selected by setting the modules EQPT attribute Transmission Mode to
the value MUXHST.
defining the roles of these facilities as either the normally working or pro-
tection member. The client side, GFP and Path facilities all follow exactly
the same rules as in the unprotected TDM configuration. The Path facili-
ties represent the paths after the effects of protection switching, so the
number of the Path facilities remains the same.
The network facilities and their associated DCN facilities obey some added
rules which did not apply to the unprotected TDM configuration, namely:
• Both of the network side facilities must be of the same type (i.e.
both OC48 or both STM16). Therefore, the second such facility to be
created must be of the same type as the first (if created due to
auto-provisioning, the system software will ensure this rule is
obeyed, even if the SYS entity SIGDEF attribute suggests a facility of
another type should be created).
• The SDCC facilities are not protected, and so the NE and NW side
instances may be provisioned independently.
• The LDCC facility will be protected along with the traffic flow, so
that its signal will always be associated with the ACT facility within
the protection group. As a convention, this facility will be
represented by an AID using a port designation of “N” and only one
LDCC instance can be provisioned in this configuration. The LDCC
facility may also be provisioned when either or both of the network
side facilities are provisioned.
In addition to these rules, which are enforced by the system, there are
also some recommended practices which will reduce the probability of ad-
verse system behavior. These practices are:
• The provisioning of signal degrade criteria (i.e Line BER Signal
Degrade for OC48 facilities and both MS Signal Degrade and MS SD
Integer. Period for STM16 facilities) should be consistent between
the two facilities to avoid possible protection switching oscillation
conditions from arising.

tion below.

Table 9-32: 4TCC2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-
Protection Role R { WKG | PROTN | NA N/A Reflects the facilities role in the
NA } associated protection group. The
group.
Table 9-33: 4TCC2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility Modified Conditions
Condition
Locatio Time Type/Alarm Severity may Effect Upon
Condition n Direction Interval Severity be set Service


Table 9-34: 4TCC2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 Additional Facility Conditions
Condition
Auto-Switch WKG To NEND NA NA TC N/A
PROTN
Auto-Switch PROTN To NEND NA NA TC N/A
WKG
MAN Switch WKG TO NEND NA NA TC N/A
PROTN
MAN Switch PROTN To NEND NA NA TC N/A
WKG

All of the properties associated with the SDCC and LDCC facilities on the
network side are identical to those defined in Section 9.3.2 “Network DCN
Facility Properties”, p. 9-264 with the exception that only the NW in-
stance of the LDCC is supported and the PROTECT attribute will have a dif-
ferent fixed value as indicated below:
Table 9-35: 4TCC2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - LDCC Facility Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-
configuration.

9.4.3 Path Facility Properties
Since the path facilities represent a point after the network protection
switching selection function, there are no changes to any of the proper-
ties associated with these facilities.
9.4.4 GFP Facility Properties

Since the GFP facilities represent a point after the network protection
switching selection function, there are no changes to any of the proper-
ties associated with these facilities.

The support of a network protection group on the 4TCC2G5 module is
Table 9-36: 4TCC2G5 Protected TDM Configuration - OC48/STM16 FFP-CH Attributes
Manual Auto-
Maintenance R { LINE } N/A N/A
Switching
Mechanism
Type
SD DISABLE }
100 | 200 | .. |
10000}

9.5 Dual Uni-directional Regenerator Configuration

The 4TCC2G5 module may be used as a dual uni-directional signal regen-
erator (EQPT Transmission Mode=REGEN1WAY, Deployment Scenario=GE-
NERIC), where each of the network side ports operates as a separate uni-
directional regenerator. In bi-directional signal applications, these two
uni-directional capabilities may be used to achieve full bi-directional sig-
nal regeneration, as shown in the figure below:
NE NE
West East
Facility Facility
NW NW
Fig. 9-2: Bi-directional Signal Regeneration Using 4TCC2G5
In this configuration, each of the network ports supports a facility in-

stance, and both facilities must be configured as the same type, either
OC48 or STM16. The facilities are limited to physical layer termination and
offer intermediate monitoring of Section/Regenerator Section and
Line/Multiplex Section layer faults and performance monitoring parame-
ters. Signal loopback operations are not possible in this configuration,

since each facility is uni-directional in nature. Note that neither an SDCC
nor an LDCC facility instance may be provisioned in this configuration on
either of the network ports.
The signals being regenerated are timed separately, in a through-timed
manner - the timing recovered from the receive side of each port will be
used to time the outgoing signal on the transmit side of the same port.
During failures of the received signal, timing for the conditioning signal
sent downstream will be provided by an on-board free-running clock.
Since it is providing a regeneration function via the network side ports,
this configuration does not permit provisioning of the client side equip-
ment plugs or the corresponding client side facilities, nor the GFP and
path layer facilities. The properties supported by the OC48 and STM16 fa-
cilities in this configuration are as shown in the following tables:
Table 9-37: 4TCC2G5 REGEN1WAY Configuration - OC48 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OC48 OC48 Auto-provisioning value will be
OC48 if the SYS attribute
SIGDEF=SONET.
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
NA }
Termination Level RE { PATH | PHYS } N/A N/A This configuration will always show
the value PHYS.
Highest R { LINE | PATH } N/A N/A This configuration will always show
Monitoring Level the value LINE.

Table 9-37: 4TCC2G5 REGEN1WAY Configuration - OC48 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE } ALS ALS ALS operation will affect the
outgoing signal on the opposite
port (i.e. a failure of the incoming
signal on NE will lead to ALS on the
NW transmit).
If a CWDM, Grey or DWDM C-Band
plug is used, then both values are
the default.
Line BER Signal Rw {5|6|7|8| 6 6 Although the value is defined, it has
Degrade 9} no effect in this configuration.
Expected string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 9-38: 4TCC2G5 REGEN1WAY Configuration - STM16 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE STM16 STM16 Auto-provisioning value will be
STM16 if the SYS attribute
SIGDEF=SDH.
string string.

Manual Auto-
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
NA }
Termination Level RE { PATH | PHYS } N/A N/A This configuration will always show
the value PHYS.
Highest R { LINE | PATH } N/A N/A This configuration will always show
Monitoring Level the value PHYS.
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE } ALS ALS ALS operation will affect the
outgoing signal on the opposite
port (i.e. a failure of the incoming
signal on NE will lead to ALS on the
NW transmit).
If a CWDM, Grey or DWDM C-Band
the default.
MS Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 30 30 Although the value is defined, it has
Degrade no effect in this configuration.
MS SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7 Although the value is defined, it has
Period no effect in this configuration.
Expected string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }

Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 9-39: 4TCC2G5 REGEN1WAY Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Table 9-39: 4TCC2G5 REGEN1WAY Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx

Table 9-40: 4TCC2G5 REGEN1WAY Configuration - OC48/STM16 Facility Conditions
Condition
Loss Of Signala NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA

Opt. Power Rx Too High NEND
This RCV NAleft blank
page intentionally MN Yes NSA
a. Even though the Section layer is not completely terminated, this condition is detected and relevant
signal conditioning is applied.

Chapter 10
8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D
The 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D module is a double slot width 8 port TDM
(Time Division Multiplexing) multiplexer which aggregates up to 8 client
side signals into an F10709 network signal. The client side signals may
be one of the following types, but must all be of the same type - either
1 Gigabit Ethernet, 1 Gigabit Fiber Channel or 2 Gigabit Fiber Channel.
Each of the client signals are 10B/8B decoded, multiplexed and trans-
ported via the F10709 signal to the far end, where that signal is de-mul-
tiplexed and the individual client signals are re-encoded using standard
8B/10B encoding. As a result, the signal transport is not bit-transparent.
termined by the variant of the module which is equipped. The 8TCA10G-
C modules contain a CWDM compatible network interface with a VLONG
reach, while the 8TCA10G-D versions include a DWDM compatible network
interface with a VLONG reach.
be user configured.

bles:
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 8TCA10G-C 8TCA10G-C
string
FW7420 F7 Vol3 8TCA10G.fm
string string.
Revision string
Manual Auto-
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Cxxxx where
Channel attribute.
string
Transmission R { MUX } N/A N/A Read from the module.
Mode
C1590 }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 8TCA10G-D 8TCA10G-D

string

Manual Auto-
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 8TCA-PC-2G1U+10G-V#Dxx where
string equipment. Dxx is the relevant value of the
Channel attribute.
string
Transmission R { MUX } N/A N/A Read from the module.
Mode
.. DL9 }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 10-3: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Condition

The type of client side plugs permitted on this module are SFP-G (Section
2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31). If the Rate attribute value ANY is provisioned, the
behavior will be to allow any of the SFPs listed below to be equipped with-
out raising a mismatch condition. The set of valid plug types permitted
Table 10-5: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D Client Side Supported Plugs and
Facilities
Equipment
SFP-G 4G G1310 SHORT FC, 2GFC
SFP-G G850 INTRA
SFP-G G1310 SHORT
SFP-G HS G1310 SHORT 1GBE, FC
SFP-G G850 INTRA
SFP-G CL G1310 INTRA 1GBE, FC, 2GFC

10.2 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D Supported Facilities

Table 10-6: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
C1 CH:2GFC State, Physical N CH: F10709 State, Operations,
Physical
C6 Not usable in this configuration.
C2 CH:2GFC State, Physical
C1 CH:FC State, Physical N CH: F10709 State, Operations,
Physical
C6 unused or
CH:FC
C2 CH:FC State, Physical
C7 unused or
CH:FC
C8 unused or
CH:FC
C5 unused or
CH:FC
C1 CH:1GBE State, Physical N CH: F10709 State, Operations,
Physical
C6 unused or
CH:1GBE
C2 CH:1GBE State, Physical
C7 unused or
CH:1GBE
C8 unused or
CH:1GBE
C5 unused or
CH:1GBE

10.3 8-port Time Division Multiplexer Configuration
Table 10-7: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - F10709 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 10-8: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - F10709 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type


Table 10-8: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - F10709 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Optical Power Rx NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -23.0 -8.0 -23.0
OPR-HT -23.0 -8.0 -8.0
Table 10-9: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - F10709 Facility Conditions
Condition

Table 10-10: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - 1GBE Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 1GBE 1GBE
string string.
Channel R see comment N/A N/A Optical channel at which the
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE ENABLE
DISABLE }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 10-11: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - FC/2GFC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE FC/2GFC N/A

string string.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | DISABLE N/A
DISABLE }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 10-12: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - 1GBE/FC/2GFC Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Seconds
Rx 4Gbps
-15.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -24.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
Rx -17.0 @ 2Gbps
-14.0 @ 4Gbps
OPR-HT -19.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Table 10-12: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - 1GBE/FC/2GFC Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -19.0 -3.0 -27.0 if below 622
Rx Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Table 10-13: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - 1GBE/FC/2GFC Facility Conditions
Condition


Table 10-13: 8TCA10G-C/8TCA10G-D TDM Configuration - 1GBE/FC/2GFC Facility Conditions
Condition


Chapter 11
8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D
The 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D module is a double slot width 8 port TDM (Time
Division Multiplexing) multiplexer which aggregates up to 8 client side
ESCON 200 Megabit/s signals in a bit-transparent manner into a 2500
Megabit/s proprietary format network signal.
termined by the variant of the module which is equipped. The 8TCE2G5-C
modules contain a CWDM single-mode fiber compatible network interface
with a VLONG reach, while the 8TCE2G5-D versions include a DWDM single-
mode fiber compatible network interface with a VLONG reach. All variants
of the module perform automatic laser shutdown operations on the net-
work port when the receive signal is lost.
using an integrated multi-mode optical interface. The transmit port op-
erates within the range of 1270 to 1380 nm. at a launch power of -21 to
-14.5 dBm, while the receiver accepts signals in the same wavelength
range with input powers between -29 to -14 dBm. The maximum reach
which may be obtained with the client ports is roughly 2 Km., depending
upon the interface at the opposite end of the 62.5 µm core multi-mode
fiber.

bles:
Table 11-1: 8TCE2G5-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 8TCE2G5-C 8TCE2G5-C
FW7420 F7 Vol3 8TCE2G5.fm
string
string string.
Table 11-1: 8TCE2G5-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Cxxxx where
Channel attribute.
string
Transmission R { MUX } N/A N/A This attribute refers to the
Mode capabilities of the network port
capabilities of the network port
C1530 | C1550 |
C1570 | C1590 |
C1610 }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 11-2: 8TCE2G5-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 8TCE2G5-D 8TCE2G5-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 8TCE-ESCON+2G5-V#Dxx where Dxx
string equipment. is the relevant value of the Channel
attribute.
string
Transmission R { MUX } N/A N/A This attribute refers to the
Mode capabilities of the network port
capabilities of the network port
DC1 .. DC9 | module capabilities of the network port.
DL1 .. DL9 }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 11-3: 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 11-4: 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

11.2 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D Supported Facilities
Table 11-5: 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
C1 CH:F200 State, Physical N CH: F2500 State, Operations, Physical
C5 CH:F200
C2 CH:F200 State, Physical
C6 CH:F200
C7 CH:F200
C8 CH:F200

11.3 8-port ESCON Time Division Multiplexer Configuration

Table 11-6: 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D TDM Configuration - F2500 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 11-7: 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D TDM Configuration - F2500 Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Seconds

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
For 8TCE2G5-D Module Only:
from
module.
Laser TEMP NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 LSRTEMP-FHT N/A N/A Read
from
module.
Table 11-8: 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D TDM Configuration - F2500 Facility Conditions
Condition
8TCE2G5-D Only:


Table 11-9: 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D TDM Configuration - F200 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
Channel R G1310 N/A N/A Optical channel at which the facility
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type


Table 11-11: 8TCE2G5-C/8TCE2G5-D TDM Configuration - F200 Facility Conditions
Condition


Chapter 12
Dispersion Compensation Modules
12.1 “DCF”, p. 12-318
12.2 “DCG”, p. 12-321
FW7420 F7 Vol3 DCMs.fm
12.1 DCF
The DCF module is a passive module containing dispersion compensating
fiber, intended for use in the mid-stage of an EDFA-DGC module to pro-
vide compensation for the accumulated chromatic dispersion encoun-
tered on the preceding optical fiber span. Each module provides support
for one direction of traffic flow passing through the module. The DCF
module exists in different variants, each of which provides compensation
for a different length S-SMF fiber span. All optical connectors are LC type.
Since the DCF modules optical functions are entirely passive, it is able to
be placed in any available slot and will provide the necessary optical sig-
nal compensation even if electrical power to the module is lost. Due to
this passive nature, the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the module
is very high.
to and from the DCF module must be manually verified during installation
lows:
Table 12-1: DCF Module Optical Specifications
Specification for Module Variant
Module Property 10 20 40 60 80 100

Insertion loss (Max in dB) 2.5 3.0 4.3 6.8 7.2 8.7
Polarization Mode Dispersion (Max in ps) 0.18 0.28 0.38 0.4 0.44 0.55
Signal Latency (Max in ns) 12500 25000 50000 75000 100000 125000

bles:
Table 12-2: DCF EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE DCF DCF
string
string string.
Revision string

Table 12-2: DCF EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the DCF-M/nn where the value of nn
string equipment. corresponds to the S-SMF fiber span
length in Km for which the module
provides appropriate dispersion
compensation.
string
Min RE { 10 | 20 | 40 | This value is Length of S-SMF type optical fiber
Compensation 60 | 80 | 100 } read from the cable for which appropriate
Cap equipment. dispersion compensation is
provided, expressed in Km of S-SMF
fiber span length.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 12-3: DCF EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Table 12-4: DCF EQPT Conditions
Condition

12.2 DCG
The DCG module is a passive module containing a dispersion compensat-
ing fiber Bragg grating, intended for use in the mid-stage of an EDFA-DGC
module to provide compensation for the accumulated chromatic disper-
sion encountered on the preceding optical fiber span. Each module pro-
vides support for one direction of traffic flow passing through the
module. The DCG module exists in different variants, each of which pro-
vides compensation for a different length S-SMF fiber span. All optical
connectors are LC type. Since the DCG modules optical functions are en-
tirely passive, it is able to be placed in any available slot and will provide
the necessary optical signal compensation even if electrical power to the
module is lost. Due to this passive nature, the Mean Time Between Failure
to and from the DCG module must be manually verified during installation
lows:
Table 12-5: DCG Module Optical Specifications
Specification for Module Variant
Module Property 60 100

Insertion loss (Max in dB) 4.5 4.5
Polarization Mode Dispersion (Max in ps) 0 0
Signal Latency (Max in ns) 50 50

bles:
Table 12-6: DCG EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE DCG DCG
string
string string.
Revision string

Table 12-6: DCG EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the DCG-M/nn/SSMF where the value of
string equipment. nn corresponds to the S-SMF fiber
span length in Km for which the
module provides appropriate
dispersion compensation.
string
Min RE { 60 | 100 } This value is Length of S-SMF type optical fiber
Compensation read from cable for which appropriate
Cap the dispersion compensation is
equipment. provided, expressed in Km of S-SMF
fiber span length.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 12-7: DCG EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Table 12-8: DCG EQPT Conditions
Condition


Chapter 13
Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifiers
13.1 “EDFA-DGC”, p. 13-326
13.2 “EDFA-S”, p. 13-335
13.3 “EDFA-SGC”, p. 13-340
FW7420 F7 Vol3 EDFAs.fm
13.1 EDFA-DGC
The EDFA-DGC module is a 2-stage Erbium doped fiber optical amplifier
with automatic dynamic gain control. It is designed for use as either a
post-amplifier, in-line amplifier or pre-amplifier in a DWDM span carrying
up to 40 channels within the supported band. The dual-stage design al-
lows a dispersion compensating module to be coupled in-line between the
first and second stages using the mid-stage facility port in order to pro-
vide chromatic dispersion compensation without impacting the optical
line budget. The module includes an integrated 1% optical tap which pro-
vides an optical sample allowing the connection of external test equip-
ment, if desired.
The C band variants of the module are single slot wide, while the L band
variant is double width (two slots wide).
The optical specifications of the modules are:
Table 13-1: EDFA-DGC Optical Specifications
Module Variant
(OM Band/Output
Operating Attribute Power Rating) Specification
Supported Wavelengths (Minimum .. Maximum) C/17, C/20 1529.40 .. 1563.05 nm
L/17 1570.42 .. 1602.31 nm
Minimum total optical input power C/17, L/17, C/20 -32 dBm
Maximum total optical input power C/17, L/17, C/20 -8 dBm
Minimum per channel input power C/17, L/17, C/20 -32 dBm
Maximum per channel input power C/17, L/17 -14 dBm for 4 channels
-17 dBm for 8 channels
C/20 -11 dBm for 4 channels
Average gain C/17, L/17, C/20a 26 dB
Midstage loss C/17, L/17 0 .. 9.7 dB

C/20 0 .. 10 dB
Minimum per channel gain C/17, C/20b 25 dB
L/17 24.5
Maximum total optical output power C/17, L/17 < 21.3 dBm

Table 13-1: EDFA-DGC Optical Specifications
Module Variant
(OM Band/Output
Operating Attribute Power Rating) Specification
Nominal total optical output power at -8 dBm total optical input C/17 17.2 dBm
power
L/17 17.8 dBm
C/20 18 dBm (approx.)
Gain flatness (over all conditions) C/17, L/17 1.6 dBpp
C/20 1.2 dBpp
Noise figure C/17, C/20 6 dB
L/17 6.5 dB
Optical return loss C/17, L/17, C/20 -40 dB
Polarization dependent gain C/17, L/17, C/20 0.5 dB
Polarization mode dispersion C/17, L/17, C/20 0.5 ps
Latency C/17, L/17 700 ns
C/20 500 ns
Maximum number of concatenations C/17, L/17 7 for G.652, G.655 fiber
2 for G.653 fiber
Maximum allowable per channel power into the transmission C/17, L/17 6 dBm for G.652
fiber 5 dBm for G.653, G.655
a. Value is for -32 .. -6 dBm total input power. For -6 .. -5 dBm total input power, decrease the stated value by 1 dB.
b. Value is for -32 .. -6 dBm total input power. For -6 .. -5 dBm total input power, decrease the stated value by 1 dB.

bles:
Table 13-2: EDFA-DGC EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE EDFA-DGC EDFA-DGC
string
string string.
Revision string
string

Revision string

Table 13-2: EDFA-DGC EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the See Table 13-3, EDFA-DGC Official
string equipment. Name Correspondence to Attribute
Values, p. 13-329.
string
OM Band RE {C|L} This value is
read from the
equipment.
Output Power RE { 17 | 20 } This value is Only the value 17 is allowed if
Rating read from the BAND=L.
equipment.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 13-3: EDFA-DGC Official Name Correspondence to Attribute Values
Attribute Values
UNITNAME OM Band Output Power Rating

EDFA-C-D17-GC C 17
EDFA-L-D17-GC L 17
EDFA-C-D20-GC C 20
Table 13-4: EDFA-DGC EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Sub-MOD NEND NA NA Decimal 1 SUBTEMP-FHT N/A N/A 70.0
TEMP
Table 13-5: EDFA-DGC EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 13-5: EDFA-DGC EQPT Conditions
Condition
Submodule TEMP Too High NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
13.1.2 EDFA-DGC Supported Facilities

Table 13-6: EDFA-DGC Supported Facility Configurations
Mid-Stage Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Attribute Facility
Dependencies Facility Type Supported Layers Type Supported Layers
2 OM:EDFA-MID State, Operations, 1 OM:EDFA State, Operations,
Physical, OM Physical, OM
13.1.3 In-Line Optical Amplifier Configuration

The EDFA-DGC in-line optical amplifier configuration contains 2 sets of
optical signal ports associated with the signal being amplified as well as
a monitor port for connection to external test equipment. The logical re-
lationship of the ports supporting the facilities showing the relationship
to their AIDs is shown in Figure 13-1, p. 13-331.
OM facility instance number 1 represents the input and output to the
module after both amplification stages. OM facility instance number 2
represents the mid-stage access, and is the point at which an optional
dispersion compensating module (DCM) may be equipped. Note that the
receive port is located after the transmit port on instance 2, while the

OM Network Facility - AID; OM-<shelf>-<slot>-1
EDFA-DGC Module
Stage 1 Stage 2
OM Mid-Stage Facility - AID; OM-<shelf>-<slot>-2
Fig. 13-1: EDFA-DGC Facility Layout


opposite ordering applies to instance 1. If a DCM is not used, the ports

of instance 2 must be optically connected via a fiber jumper to provide
optical continuity of the signal path through both stages of the amplifier
module.
13.1.3.1 OM Facility Properties

Table 13-7: EDFA-DGC ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE EDFA EDFA
string string.
Gain RW { 24 | 25 } 25 25
Tilt RW { -2.0 .. 0.0 } 0.0 0.0
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 13-8: EDFA-DGC ILA Configuration - EDFA-MID Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE EDFA-MID EDFA-MID
string string.

Table 13-8: EDFA-DGC ILA Configuration - EDFA-MID Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 13-9: EDFA-DGC ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
LBCL Average NEND NA NA Decimal 3 No thresholds defined.
Operating NEND NA NA Integer No thresholds defined.
Hours
Optical Power NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 OPT-FLT N/A N/A 0
Tx
OPT-FHT N/A N/A 14.0
For Modules with POWER=17:
Rx
OPR-HT -32.0 -8.0 -8.0
For Modules with POWER=20:
Rx
OPR-HT -32.0 -5.0 -5.0

Table 13-10: EDFA-DGC ILA Configuration - EDFA-MID Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
ATT Between NEND NA NA Decimal 1 No thresholds defined.
Stages
Optical Power Rx NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 No thresholds defined.
Optical Power Tx NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 No thresholds defined.
Table 13-11: EDFA-DGC ILA Configuration - EDFA/EDFA-MID Facility Conditions
Condition
EDFA-MID Facility Only:
EDFA Facility Only:
Laser End of Life NEND TRMT NA MN Yes NSA
Auto Shutdown (High NEND TRMT NA CR Yes SA
Temp)
Auto Shutdown (Tx Power) NEND TRMT NA CR Yes SA
Midstage Fault NEND NA NA CR Yes SA

13.2 EDFA-S
The EDFA-S module is a single-stage Erbium doped fiber optical amplifier
providing cost effective gain using fixed power pumps for up to 4 chan-
nels. It is designed for use as either a in-line amplifier or pre-amplifier
for an up to 4 channel group within a DWDM network element.
Both variants of the module are double width (two slots wide).
Table 13-12: EDFA-S Optical Specifications
Module Variant
Operating Attribute (OM Band) Specification
Supported Wavelengths C 1529.55 .. 1561.42 nm
(Minimum .. Maximum) L 1569.59 .. 1603.17 nm
Minimum total optical input power C, L -31 dBm
Maximum total optical input power C, L -14 dBm
Minimum per channel input power C, L -31 dBm
Maximum per channel input power C, L -20 dBm
Typical gain C 30 dB (groups D01-D04, D05-D08),
23 dB (groups D09-D12 through D29-D32)
L 21 dB
Minimum gain C 23 dB (groups D01-D04, D05-D08),
20 dB (groups D09-D12 through D29-D32)
L 20 dB
Maximum total optical output power C 10 .. 13 dBm
L 10 .. 14 dBm
Gain flatness (over all conditions) C 3 dBpp (groups D01-D04, D05-D08),
1 dBpp (groups D09-D12 through D29-D32)
L 1 dBpp (groups D33-D36 through D61-D64)
Noise figure C 6 dB
L 7 dB
Optical return loss C, L -35 dB
Latency C 300 ns
L 500 ns
Maximum number of concatenations C 2 (groups D01-D04, D05-D08),
4 (groups D09-D12 through D29-D32)
L 3 (groups D33-D36, D37-D40),
4 (groups D41-D44 through D61-D64)


bles:
Table 13-13: EDFA-S EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE EDFA-S EDFA-S
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the EDFA-C-S10 if OM Band=C,
string equipment. EDFA-L-S10 if OM Band=L.
string
OM Band RE {C|L} This value is read from the equipment.
Output Power R { 10 } This value is read from the equipment.
Rating
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 13-14: EDFA-S EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Sub-MOD TEMP NEND NA NA Decimal 1 SUBTEMP-FHT N/A N/A 70.0
Table 13-15: EDFA-S EQPT Conditions
Condition

13.2.2 EDFA-S Supported Facilities

Table 13-16: EDFA-S Supported Facility Configurations
Network
Port(s)
Attribute Dependencies Facility Type Supported Layers
1 OM:EDFA State, Operations, Physical, OM

Table 13-17: EDFA-S ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 13-18: EDFA-S ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location

Type and

Seconds

Table 13-18: EDFA-S ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Type and
Rx
OPR-HT -31.0 -14.0 -14.0
Tx
Laser TEMP NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 LSRTEMP-FLT N/A N/A Read
from
module.
NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 LSRTEMP-FHT N/A N/A Read
from
module.
Table 13-19: EDFA-S ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility Conditions
Condition
TEC End of Life NEND TRMT NA MN Yes NSA

13.3 EDFA-SGC
The EDFA-SGC module is a single-stage Erbium doped fiber optical ampli-
fier with automatic dynamic gain control. It is designed for use as either
a post-amplifier, in-line amplifier or pre-amplifier in a DWDM span carry-
ing up to 40 channels within the C band. The module includes an inte-
grated 1% optical tap on the output which provides an optical sample at
a monitoring port allowing the connection of external test equipment, if
desired.
The module is a single slot wide.
Table 13-20: EDFA-SGC Optical Specifications
Operating Attribute Specification

Supported Wavelengths (Minimum .. Maximum) 1529.40 .. 1563.05 nm
Minimum total optical input power -32 dBm
Maximum total optical input power -5 dBm
Minimum per channel input power -32 dBm
Maximum per channel input power -11 dBm for 4 channels
Average gain 23.5 dB
Minimum per channel gain 22.5 dB
Maximum total optical output power < 21.3 dBm
Nominal total optical output power at -5 dBm total 18 dBm
optical input power
Gain flatness (over all conditions) 1.6 dBpp
Noise figure 6 dB
Optical return loss -40 dB
Polarization dependent gain 0.5 dB
Polarization mode dispersion 0.5 ps
Latency 300 ns
Maximum number of concatenations 7 for G.652, G.655 fiber
2 for G.653 fiber
Maximum allowable per channel power into the 6 dBm for G.652
transmission fiber 5 dBm for G.653, G.655

bles:
Table 13-21: EDFA-SGC EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE EDFA-SGC EDFA-SGC
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the EDFA-C-S18-GC
string equipment.
string
OM Band RE C C C
Output Power RE { 18 } 18 18
Rating
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 13-22: EDFA-SGC EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Sub-MOD NEND NA NA Decimal 1 SUBTEMP-FHT N/A N/A 70.0
TEMP
Table 13-23: EDFA-SGC EQPT Conditions
Condition

13.3.2 EDFA-SGC Supported Facilities
Table 13-24: EDFA-SGC Supported Facility Configurations
Network
Port(s)
1 OM:EDFA State, Operations, Physical, OM

Table 13-25: EDFA-SGC ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 13-26: EDFA-SGC ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
LBCL Average NEND NA NA Decimal 3 No thresholds defined.

Operating Hours NEND NA NA Integer No thresholds defined.

Table 13-26: EDFA-SGC ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
OPR-HT -32.0 -5.5 -5.5
Optical Power Tx NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 OPT-FLT N/A N/A 0
OPT-FHT N/A N/A 14.0
Table 13-27: EDFA-SGC ILA Configuration - EDFA Facility Conditions
Condition
Laser End of Life NEND TRMT NA MN Yes NSA
Auto Shutdown (High NEND TRMT NA CR Yes SA
Temp)
Auto Shutdown (Tx Power) NEND TRMT NA CR Yes SA

Chapter 14
FCU7HU
The FCU7HU is a field replacable fan controller assembly for use in the
SH7HU type shelf. The assembly includes 3 fans and an associated con-
troller which automatically monitors the air temperature passing through
the module and adjusts the rotational speed of the fans to vary the rate
of airflow and maintain the desired level of cooling for the modules
equipped within the shelf.
The module also contains an LCD display showing the assigned shelf num-
ber, status LEDs for each slot, a status LED for the FAN assembly, push
buttons for setting the shelf number and alarm summary LEDs used to pro-
vide the Network Element alarm summary (CR, MJ, MN active conditions)
should the shelf contain an NCU/NCU2E module and be acting as the NE
master shelf.
FW7420 F7 Vol3 FCU.fm

bles:
Table 14-1: FCU7HU EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE FCU7HU FCU7HU
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the FAN/PLUG-IN
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 14-2: FCU7HU EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 14-3: FCU7HU EQPT Conditions
Condition
FAN Abnormal NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
FAN Fault NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA
Equipment Removed NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA


Chapter 15
NCU/NCU2E
The NCU/NCU2E is the gateway between the Network Element and both
users and management systems performing Operations, Administration,
Maintenance and Provisioning (OAM&P) functions. The NCU/NCU2E is al-
ways located in primary shelf number 1 (shelf AID=SHELF-1) and contains
USB (USB 2.0 slave compliant with RS-232-C emulation) and Ethernet
(10/100 Mbps Full/Half duplex auto-negotiating) communications ports
used to access the Network Element - one of each type on the NCU and 2
of each type on the NCU2E. The NCU also contains a serial (D-Sub 9 con-
nector).
The NCU/NCU2E also acts as the termination point for remote access per-
formed via any Optical Supervisory Channel(s) supported by the NE. Com-
munication methods include file transfer via FTP, using Telnet to access
the proprietary craft or TL1 interface, or the use of an SNMP interface.
The NCU/NCU2E module is available in different grades, and the grade of
the NCU/NCU2E used within a given Network Element determines the set
of services and module types which the NE will support. The NCU/NCU2E
communicates with the SCUs in each shelf to perform its control and mon-
itoring functions. If an inserted module is unable to be supported by that
NE as determined by the grade of the NCU/NCU2E, the module will not
auto-provision, nor may it be manually provisioned, although the physi-
cal inventory information for the module may be retrieved from the equip-
FW7420 F7 Vol3 NCUs.fm
ment position in which it resides. The available grades of NCU/NCU2E and

the services and module types supported by each are summarized in the
following table:
Table 15-1: Grades of NCU/NCU2E and Supported Services and Modules
Grade of NCU/NCU2E
Services or Module Types A B GDPS

Support for CWDM Yes Yes Yes
Support for DWDM Yes Yes
Support of WCA* and xTCA* (access Yes Yes Yes
type) modules
Support of WCE* and xTCE* (enterprise Yes Yes
type) modules
Support of WCC* and xTCC* (core type) Yes Yes
modules
Support for FC facilities Yes Yes
GDPS support Yes
In this release, the initial type of NCU/NCU2E equipped will determine the
capabilities of the NE, and it is not possible to change the capabilities
for a given NE via the TL1 interface.

bles:
Table 15-2: NCU/NCU2E EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE NCU/NCU2E NCU/NCU2E Type will be determined by the first
module type physically present
when the system is first powered
up.
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the NCU/NCU2E
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 15-3: NCU/NCU2E EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Table 15-4: NCU/NCU2E EQPT Conditions
Condition

15.2 NCU Supported Facilities
Table 15-5: NCU Supported Facilities
Attribute Dependencies
Port(s) Facility Type Supported Layers
{ 1 .. 10 } DCN: PPPIP State, PPPIP
C DCN: LANIP State, Physical
SER DCN: SERIAL State

15.3 NCU2E Supported Facilities

Table 15-6: NCU2E Supported Facility Configurations
{ 1 .. 10 } DCN: PPPIP State, PPPIP
C1, C2 DCN: LANIP State, Physical
SER DCN: SERIAL State

15.4 NCU/NCU2E Facility Configurations
The NCU/NCU2E does not have different configurations, although the
number of service terminations supported by the module will vary de-
pending upon provisioning of service channel terminations supported on
the module.
All of the ports physically terminated on the NCU/NCU2E, with the excep-
tion of the USB2 port on the NCU2E, will be automatically provisioned so
that access to the NE is possible. If any of the ports are to be disabled as
part of the security strategy employed to safe-guard access to the NE,
these ports must be manually disabled or de-provisioned once their asso-
ciated facilities have been disabled or deleted. Changes to the provision-
ing of the NCU/NCU2E and its associated ports and facilities are recorded
within the NE database, so removal and re-insertion of an NCU/NCU2E
module - whether the same module or a different module - will not result
in auto-provisioning of ports previously disabled by provisioning chang-
es. To ensure access to the NE, the system software will prevent any ac-
tion which would de-provision the final access path available for
connection to the NE - this includes both local and remote access paths,
at least one of which must remain provisioned at all times.
On the NCU, two of the physical ports - the D-Sub 9 serial port and the
USB port - are actually different physical formats which share the same
hardware signal pathways and the serial facility instance (DCN facility of
type SERIAL, AID=LINK-1-A-SER). The remaining physical port is the
Ethernet client port (the C port) which supports a single DCN facility of
type LANIP (AID=SC-1-A-C). On the NCU2E, there are 2 USB type ports,
where USB1 is equivalent to the USB interface of the serial port on the
NCU, and 2 Ethernet client ports (ports C1 and C2) which each support a
single DCN facility of type LANIP (AID=SC-1-A-C1 and SC-1-A-C2, respec-
tively).
In addition to the facilities which are physically terminated on the
NCU/NCU2E, there are 10 DCN facilities of type PPPIP representing the
logical termination points for embedded communication links. These
links are physically terminated on another module as a DCN facility type
(such as EOC, SDCC, LDCC or GCC0/GCC0S/GCC1/GCC2) and are cross con-
nected to one of the PPPIP instances on the NCU/NCU2E as a means of
defining the routing of packets between these facilities and the
NCU/NCU2E management function. The PPPIP facilities are named LINK-
1-A-1 through LINK-1-A-10, and their assignment may be retrieved via
the retrieve DCN cross connect command (see TL-1 Manual or contact Tech-
nical Support.). In this release, the craft interface or the SNMP interface
must be used to create, modify or delete such cross connections - only
retrieval is supported via the TL1 interface.
The following sub-sections provide details of the attributes for each of

these facility types.

15.4.1 NCU/NCU2E Facility Properties

Table 15-7: NCU/NCU2E SERIAL Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE SERIAL SERIAL This facility will auto-provision.
string string.
Baud Rate Rw { 2400 | 4800 | 19200 19200
9600 | 19200 |
38400 | 57600 |
115200 }
Flow Control RW { NONE | HW | NONE NONE
PAUSE }
Parity Bit R { NO } N/A N/A Read from the module.
DSBLD }a value for both manual creation and
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
a. Note that there is no Valid Signal Timer attribute, and so a facility in the AINS state will transition to IS immediately
once a valid, error free signal is detected.
Table 15-8: NCU/NCU2E LANIP Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE LANIP LANIP This facility will auto-provision.
string string.
IP Address RE x.x.x.x, where x
IP Mask RE x.x.x.x, where x IP Address mask value.
OSPF Routing Rw { ENABLE | DISABLE DISABLE
DISABLE }
AREA ID Rw x.x.x.x, where x 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 May only be changed if the OSPF
Routing attribute value is DISABLE.
Routing Metric Rw { 0 .. 65535 } 100 100

Table 15-8: NCU/NCU2E LANIP Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Auto-Negotiation Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE ENABLE If changed to DISABLE, the value of
DISABLE } BITRATE will be set to 100 and that
of DUPLEX to FULL unless otherwise
specified in the command effecting
the change.
Datarate RW { 10 | 100 } 100 100 When AUTONEG=ENABLE, this value
will reflect the actual bit rate at
which the facility is operating and
may not be changed.
Duplex Mode Rw { HALF | FULL } FULL FULL When AUTONEG=ENABLE, this value
will reflect the actual mode in which
the facility is operating and may not
be changed.
Table 15-9: NCU/NCU2E PPPIP Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE PPPIP PPPIP
string string.
IP Address RE x.x.x.x, where x see comment see comment IP address of near end.
Far End IP R x.x.x.x, where x N/A N/A

Address
ECC AID R { AID value } N/A N/A AID of the Embedded
Communication Channel
supporting this facility.

Use As Default RE {Y|N} N N
Gateway

Table 15-9: NCU/NCU2E PPPIP Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Enable Proxy ARP RE {Y|N} N N
Datarate RW { 1 .. 1300 } 100 100
OSPF Routing Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE ENABLE
DISABLE }
AREA ID Rw x.x.x.x, where x 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 May only be changed if the OSPF
attribute value is DISABLE.
Routing Metric Rw { 0 .. 65535 } 100 100
DSBLD }a default value for both manual
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
The SERIAL, LANIP and PPPIP facilities on the NCU/NCU2E do not support
any facility PMs.
Table 15-10: NCU/NCU2E SERIAL Facility Conditions
Condition
Link Control Error NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA
Table 15-11: NCU/NCU2E LANIP Facility Conditions
Condition


Table 15-11: NCU/NCU2E LANIP Facility Conditions
Condition
External Link Failure NEND RCV NA MJ Yes NSA
Table 15-12: NCU/NCU2E PPPIP Facility Conditions
Condition
Link Control Error NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA
Loopback Error NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA


Chapter 16
OSCM/2OSCM
The OSCM supports a bi-directional optical supervisory channel carrying a
100 mega-bits per second (Mbps) Ethernet full-duplex signal. The 2OSCM
module supports 2 such bi-directional optical ports, making it ideal for
use in a ring or line protected network. The optical ports are embedded
components of the modules - they do not utilize pluggable modules (i.e.
SFPs). These modules are a key component of the data communication
network (DCN), supporting remote access operations, administration,
maintenance and provisioning (OAM&P) functions. In order to provide
protection and topology discovery functions, at least one 2OSCM or OSCM
module must be provisioned and equipped within an NE.
Each OSCM/2OSCM module also supports 3 10/100 BaseT electrical Ether-
net ports supporting auto-baud and auto-duplex detection plus a layer 2
switching function connecting all of the ports. Each optical port on these
modules utilizes a laser operating at 1630 nm. to carry the VLONG reach
OSC optical signal, whose content is terminated on the NCU/NCU2E. The
received signal level is monitored to detect fiber breaks and to monitor
line attenuation in order to detect fiber intrusion attempts. The data car-
ried by the optical signal conveys the network topology and status of the
various links and circuits, providing the information necessary for optical
protection switching operations. The laser supports Automatic Laser
Shutdown (ALS) which provides optical safety whenever a fiber break oc-
curs while still ensuring automatic recovery once the fiber has been re-
paired or replaced.
The specifications for the optical port are:
Property Specification
Wavelength 1630 nm
Optical Output Power -2 to +4 dBm
Receiver Dynamic Range -32 to -5 dBm
Optical Power Measurement Accuracy ±1.5 dB
Optical Connector Type Duplex LC
Fiber Type Single Mode Fiber (G.652)
FW7420 F7 Vol3 OSCMs.fm

bles:
Table 16-1: OSCM/2OSCM EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE OSCM/2OSCM OSCM/2OSCM Auto-provisioning default matches
the equipped module type.
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the OSCM-V#1630 if OSCM,
string equipment. 2OSCM-V#1630 if 2OSCM.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 16-2: OSCM/2OSCM EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 16-3: OSCM/2OSCM EQPT Conditions
Condition
General HW Fault NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA
Equipment Mismatch NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA

16.2 2OSCM Supported Facilities

Table 16-4: 2OSCM Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Attribute Facility
Dependencies Facility Type Supported Layers Type Supported Layers
C1, C2, DCN: State, Physical NW, DCN: E100FX State, Physical
C3 E10-100TX NE

16.3 OSCM Supported Facilities
Table 16-5: OSCM Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Attribute
Dependencies Facility Type Supported Layers Facility Type Supported Layers
C1, C2, DCN: State, Physical NW, DCN: E100FX State, Physical
C3 E10-100TX NE

16.4 OSCM/2OSCM Facility Configurations

The optical facilities on the OSCM/2OSCM are DCN facilities of the E100FX
type (100 Mbps full duplex optical Ethernet signals). The lasers used to
generate the optical carrier signal remain active even if the facility and
module administrative states are set to DSBLD, since the signal is used as
a continuity check and intrusion detection mechanism by the far end sys-
tems at which the OSC is terminated. Termination of the signal carried
over the OSC is managed by cross connecting the optical facilities to PP-
PIP facility instances on the NCU/NCU2E module. The optical ports are
considered the network side ports while the electrical ports are consid-
ered the client side ports.
Each of the 3 electrical ports supports an independent DCN facility of the
E10-100TX type (10/100 Mbps Ethernet port). Each port may automatical-
ly detect the rate and duplex mode or may be manually configured to
fixed settings if desired. The physical ports are RJ-45 female connectors.
All of the DCN facilities on the module will be automatically provisioned
when the OSCM/2OSCM module is either auto-provisioned or manually
provisioned.
The following sub-sections provide details of the attributes for each of
these facility types.

Table 16-6: OSCM/2OSCM E100FX Network Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE E100FX E100FX This facility will auto-provision
whenever the module is created,
whether the module is manually
provisioned or auto-provisioned.
string string.
Receiver SD TH Rw { 2.0 .. 35.0 } 25.0 25.0
Rx Att. Gradient Rw { 0.5 .. 3.0 } 0.5 0.5
TH
Far End SD TH R { 2.0 .. 35.0 } N/A N/A
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 16-7: OSCM/2OSCM E100FX Network Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
LBCN NEND TRMT NA 0 .. 200 No thresholds defined.
Attenuation NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 No thresholds defined.
Tx Fiber
Attenuation NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 ATRCV-LT 2.0 35.0 2.0
Rx Fiber
ATRCV-HT 2.0 35.0 35.0

Table 16-8: OSCM/2OSCM E100FX Network Facility Conditions
Condition
Laser Failure NEND TRMT NA MJ Yes NSA
Loss Of Signal NEND RCV NA MJ Yes NSA
Attenuation Rx Too Low NEND RCV NA MN Yes NSA
Attenuation Rx Too High NEND RCV NA MN Yes NSA
Rx Attenuation Too Low NEND RCV NA MN Yes NSA
Rx Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ Yes SA
Rx Fiber Intrusion NEND RCV NA TC N/A
Tx Fiber Intrusion NEND TRMT NA TC N/A

Table 16-9: OSCM/2OSCM E10-100TX Client Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE E10-100TX E10-100TX This facility will auto-provision
whenever the module is created,
whether the module is manually
provisioned or auto-provisioned.
string string.
Auto-Negotiation Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE ENABLE If set to DISABLE, BITRATE and
DISABLE } DUPLEX become editable and
determine the operating
characteristics. While ENABLE,
BITRATE and DUPLEX reflect the
negotiated operating mode.
Datarate RW { 10 | 100 } see comment see comment If the AUTONEG value is set to
DISABLE this value will default to
100.
Duplex Mode Rw { HALF | FULL see comment see comment If the AUTONEG value is set to
} DISABLE this value will default to
FULL.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
The E10-100TX client facilities on the OSCM/2OSCM do not support any

facility PMs.
Table 16-10: OSCM/2OSCM E10-100TX Client Facility Conditions
Condition


Table 16-10: OSCM/2OSCM E10-100TX Client Facility Conditions
Condition
OOS Rx Disabled NEND RCV NA NA Yes NSA

Chapter 17
Protection Modules
17.1 “1PM”, p. 17-372
17.2 “2PM”, p. 17-375
FW7420 F7 Vol3 nPMs.fm
17.1 1PM
The 1PM module is a passive optical splitter/combiner used to support
module style protection services for client signals. The module contains
2 100:50/50 optical splitters arranged so that one acts as a power splitter
for the client NE received signal feeding a copy to each of two transpon-
der or muxponder modules while the other acts in reverse as an optical
signal combiner, accepting the client side transmit signals from the tran-
sponder/muxponder modules and sending the result to the client side
output port. By ensuring that only one of the two transponder or mux-
ponder module ports joined via the 1PM module is transmitting at any
one time, the 1PM module is able to provide a passive optical bridge of
the active signal to the drop direction client NE fiber, supporting the pro-
tection switching mechanism.
The 1PM module exists in 2 versions - one for single mode fiber applica-
tions and one for multi-mode fiber applications. All optical connectors
are LC type. Since the 1PM modules optical functions are entirely passive,
it is able to placed in any available slot and will provide the necessary
optical signal coupling and splitting required by the protection subsystem
the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the module is very high, ensur-
ing high reliability for this part of the protection switching structure.
so there are no facility instances supported by this module. Since these
items are not managed, the system will not verify the provisioning of a
1PM module has occurred prior to the provisioning of a corresponding
card protection group. Connections to and from the 1PM module must be
manually verified to avoid adverse effects on the operation of the protec-
tion group.

bles:
Table 17-1: 1PM EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 1PM 1PM
string

string string.

Manual Auto-
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 1PM/MM if FIBER=MM,
string equipment. 1PM/SM if FIBER=SM.
string
Fiber Type RE { SM | MM } see Auto-provisioning default will
comment match the equipped module.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 17-2: 1PM EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 17-3: 1PM EQPT Conditions
Condition


Condition

17.2 2PM
The 2PM module is equivalent to 2 1PM modules - it provides a dual pas-
sive optical splitter/combiner pair used to support card style protection
services for 2 independent client signals. The module contains 2 sets of
2 100:50/50 optical splitters arranged so that one of each pair acts as a
power splitter for the client NE received signal feeding a copy to each of
two transponder or muxponder modules while the other acts in reverse as
an optical signal combiner, accepting the client side transmit signals
from the transponder/muxponder modules and sending the result to the
client side output port. By ensuring that only one of the two transponder
or muxponder module ports joined via the 2PM module is transmitting at
any one time, the 2PM module is able to provide a passive optical bridge
of the active signal to the drop direction client NE fibers, supporting two
parallel instances of the protection switching mechanism.
The 2PM module exists in 2 versions - one for single mode fiber applica-
tions and one for multi-mode fiber applications. All optical connectors
are LC type. Since the 2PM modules optical functions are entirely passive,
it is able to placed in any available slot and will provide the necessary
optical signal coupling and splitting required by the protection subsystem
the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of the module is very high, ensur-
ing high reliability for this part of the protection switching structure.
so there are no facility instances supported by this module. Since these
items are not managed, the system will not verify the provisioning of a
2PM module has occurred prior to the provisioning of a corresponding
card protection group. Connections to and from the 2PM module must be
manually verified to avoid adverse effects on the operation of the protec-
tion group.

bles:
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE 2PM 2PM
string
string string.

Manual Auto-
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the 2PM/MM if FIBER=MM,
string equipment. 2PM/SM if FIBER=SM.
string
Fiber Type RE { SM | MM } see comment Auto-provisioning default will
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 17-5: 2PM EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Condition


Condition


Power Supply Units
18.1 “PSU7HU-AC”, p. 18-380
18.2 “PSU7HU-DC”, p. 18-383
FW7420 F7 Vol3 PSUs.fm

18.1 PSU7HU-AC
The PSU7HU-AC is a double-width module used to convert 100~240 VAC
@ 50~60 Hz supplied via a connector on the front of the module into the
12.2 VDC power level fed to all other modules within an SH7HU type shelf
via backplane power traces. While it is possible to provision and equip
more than one PSU7HU-AC within a shelf, and even to mix them with
PSU7HU-DC type modules within a shelf, typical installations will normal-
ly require only 1 module to be provisioned and equipped per shelf. It is
recommended that the PSU7HU-AC module, when used, be provisioned
and equipped in slot 1 within the SH7HU shelf.
18.1.1.1 PSU7HU-AC Module Attributes

bles:
Table 18-1: PSU7HU-AC EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Attribute Name Type This pageValues
Allowed intentionally
Default left blank
Default Comments
Equipment Type RE PSU7HU-AC PSU7HU-AC
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the PSU/7U-AC
string equipment.
string

Table 18-1: PSU7HU-AC EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 18-2: PSU7HU-AC EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Current NEND NA NA Decimal 3 AMP-FHT N/A N/A 34.000
Table 18-3: PSU7HU-AC EQPT Conditions
Condition
Equipment Mismatch NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA


Table 18-3: PSU7HU-AC EQPT Conditions
Condition
Severe PSU Failure NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
Equipment Removed NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
Input Voltage Failure NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
Current Too High NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA

18.2 PSU7HU-DC
The PSU7HU-DC is a double-width module used to convert a nominal -48
VDC office supply (-36~-72 VDC for front supply type, -40.5~-57.0 VDC for
rear supply type) into the 12.2 VDC power level fed to all other modules
within an SH7HU type shelf via backplane power traces. It is possible to
provision and equip more than one PSU7HU-DC within a shelf, and even
to mix them with PSU7HU-AC type modules within a shelf. Typical instal-
lations will normally require 2 modules to be provisioned and equipped
per shelf. It is recommended that the PSU7HU-DC module, when used, be
provisioned and equipped in slots 1 and 19 within the SH7HU shelf.
The module exists in 2 variants, one employing front access connections
to the office supply and one employing rear access. The rear access mod-
ule types must be used only in the rear power access variant of the SH7HU
shelf.
18.2.1.1 PSU7HU-DC Module Attributes

bles:page intentionally left blank
This
Table 18-4: PSU7HU-DC EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE PSU7HU-DC PSU7HU-DC
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the PSU/7U-DC if SUPPLY=FRONT,
string equipment. PSU/7U-R-DC if SUPPLY=REAR.
string

Table 18-4: PSU7HU-DC EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Supply Type RE { FRONT | matches
REAR } equipped
module
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 18-5: PSU7HU-DC EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Current NEND NA NA Decimal 3 AMP-FHT N/A N/A 34.000
Table 18-6: PSU7HU-DC EQPT Conditions
Condition
Equipment Mismatch NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA


Table 18-6: PSU7HU-DC EQPT Conditions
Condition
Severe PSU Failure NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
Equipment Removed NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
Current Too High NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA


Chapter 19
Switch Modules
19.1 “RSM-OLM”, p. 19-388
19.2 “RSM-SF”, p. 19-395
19.3 “VSM”, p. 19-401
FW7420 F7 Vol3 RSM_VSM.fm
19.1 RSM-OLM
The RSM-OLM module is an optical switch module with an integrated 1630
nm laser used for monitoring the continuity of a point-to-point redun-
dant fiber line pair. The 1630 nm laser operates with automatic laser safe-
ty features.
In the out-bound direction, an input WDM line signal is split into two op-
tical paths with identical power levels (i.e. a 50/50 split) and then mul-
tiplexed with the signal from the 1630 nm laser. The 1630 nm signal
allows the continuity of each of the optical lines as well as their attenu-
ation over time to be monitored to enable detection of failures (i.e. fiber
cuts or high loss bends), long term degradation and intrusion attempts.
In the in-bound direction, the optical signals from the two incoming fiber
paths have their respective 1630 nm signals removed and monitored for
power level and loss conditions. The remaining optical signals on the 2
paths are then sent to an optical switch selecting which optical signal is
sent to the Network Element based upon the provisioned configuration
and the net effects of both manual and automatic protection switching
triggers.
The optical specifications of the module is:
Table 19-1: RSM-OLM Optical Specifications

Optical Connector Type MU
Optical Fiber Type Single Mode (G.652)
Maximum insertion loss (client to network port) 2.3 dB
Pilot laser output on line port -4 .. 0 dBm
Pilot signal receiver dynamic range -32 .. 0 dBm
Measurement accuracy ±1.5 dB
Measurement range of network side span loss 0 .. 26 dB loss
Threshold for Loss of Signal declarationa <-32 dBm
Maximum switching time 50 msec.

a. The loss threshold is sufficient for maximum span loss (26 dB) plus maximum insertion loss
of the 2 RSM-OLM modules (2.3 dB x 2 = 4.6 dB) plus the worst case measurement inaccuracy
(1.5 dB).


bles:
Table 19-2: RSM-OLM EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE RSM-OLM RSM-OLM
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the RSM-OLM#1630
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 19-3: RSM-OLM EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Table 19-4: RSM-OLM EQPT Conditions
Condition
Switch Failure NEND NA NA CR Yes SA

19.1.2 RSM-OLM Supported Facilities
Table 19-5: RSM-OLM Supported Facility Configurations
Network
Port(s)
NW, OM:SWITCH State, Physical, Protection
NE
19.1.3 Optical Line Protection Configuration

The RSM-OLM module Optical Line Protection configuration supports re-
dundant point-to-point fiber pairs carrying WDM signals without associ-
ated Optical Supervisory Channels (OSCs). OSC signals cannot be
employed when using the RSM-OLM due to the inclusion of a 1630 nm la-
ser within the module which is used for monitoring the continuity and
attenuation level (span loss) of the fiber pairs. The protection provided
by the module is modelled as an OM facility FFP group.
In this release, there is no need to manage the local NE side optical port
via the TL1 interface, and so, only those facilities on the network side of
the module will exist. The following sub-sections summarize the at-
tributes of the OM facilities supported in this configuration.

19.1.3.1 Network Facility Properties

Table 19-6: RSM-OLM Optical Line Protection Configuration - OM Network Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE SWITCH SWITCH
string string.
NA }
Receiver SD TH Rw { 0 .. 25.0 } 20.0 20.0
Rx Att. Gradient Rw { 0.5 .. 3.0 } 0.5 0.5
TH
Far End SD TH R { 0 .. 25.0 } N/A N/A
LEVEL R { OT } N/A N/A
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 19-7: RSM-OLM Optical Line Protection Configuration - OM Network Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Attenuation Rx NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 ATRCV-LT 0 26.0 0
Fiber
ATRCV-HT 0 26.0 26.0
Attenuation Tx NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 ATTRMT-LT 0 26.0 0

Fiber
ATTRMT-HT 0 26.0 26.0

Table 19-8: RSM-OLM Optical Line Protection Configuration - OM Network Facility Conditions
Condition
Rx Signal Degrade NEND RCV NA MJ Yes SA
Rx Fiber Intrusion NEND RCV NA TC N/A
Tx Fiber Intrusion NEND TRMT NA TC N/A
Far End LOS FEND RCV NA NR Yes NSA
Auto-Switch WKG To NEND NA NA TC N/A
PROTN
Auto-Switch PROTN To NEND NA NA TC N/A
WKG
MAN Switch WKG TO NEND NA NA TC N/A
PROTN
MAN Switch PROTN To NEND NA NA TC N/A
WKG
Attenuation Rx Too Low NEND RCV NA MN Yes NSA
Attenuation Rx Too High NEND RCV NA MN Yes NSA
Attenuation Tx Too Low NEND TRMT NA NA Yes NSA
Attenuation Tx Too High NEND TRMT NA NA Yes NSA

19.1.3.2 Network Protection Group Properties

The attributes of the OM type SWITCH facility protection group supported
by the RSM-OLM are summarized in the table below. In this release, there
are no Conditions or Performance Monitoring related registers or thresh-
olds associated with the protection group instance (although relevant
conditions do exist on the network facilities, as described above).
The protection group will be a OM type FFP, and may be created manually
via the ENT-FFP-OM command - it will not auto-provision. The protection
group operates in a bi-directional manner.
Table 19-9: RSM-OLM Optical Line Protection Configuration - FFP-OM Attributes
Manual Auto-
Protection RE { SWITCH } N/A
Mechanism
Protection Group R { LINE } N/A N/A
Type
SD DISABLE }

19.2 RSM-SF
The RSM-SF module is an optical switch module with an integrated laser
used for monitoring the continuity of a point-to-point redundant fiber
line pair carrying bi-directional DWDM optical signals on each fiber. The
module exists in 2 variants which must always be deployed together at
opposite ends of the fiber span - one variant employs a 1310 nm laser
while the other employs a 1510 nm laser.
In the out-bound direction, an input DWDM line signal is multiplexed with
the signal from the on-board laser and is then split into two optical paths
with identical power levels (i.e. a 50/50 split). The on-board laser signal
allows the continuity of each of the optical lines o be monitored to enable
detection of failures (i.e. fiber cuts or high loss bends).
In the in-bound direction, the optical signals from the two incoming fiber
paths have their respective monitoring laser signals removed and moni-
tored for loss conditions. The remaining optical signals on the 2 paths are
then sent to an optical switch selecting which optical signal is sent to
the Network Element based upon the provisioned configuration and the
net effects of both manual and automatic protection switching triggers.
Table 19-10: RSM-SF Optical Specifications

Optical Connector Type MU
Maximum insertion loss (client to network port) 3 dB
Pilot laser output on line port -4.5 .. 0 dBm
Pilot signal receiver dynamic range -3 .. 0 dBm
Measurement accuracy ±1.5 dB
Measurement range of network side span loss 0 .. 26 dB loss
Threshold for Loss of Signal declaration <-30 dBm


bles:
Table 19-11: RSM-SF EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE RSM-SF RSM-SF
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the RSM-SF#1310 if Channel=S1310 or
string equipment. RSM-SF#1510 if Channel=S1510.
string
Channel RE { S1310 | matches
S1510 } equipped
module
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 19-12: RSM-SF EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 19-13: RSM-SF EQPT Conditions
Condition

19.2.2 RSM-SF Supported Facilities

Table 19-14: RSM-SF Supported Facility Configurations
Network
Port(s)
NE

The RSM-SF module Optical Line Protection configuration supports redun-
dant point-to-point fibers each carrying bi-directional DWDM signals
without associated Optical Supervisory Channels (OSCs). OSC signals can-
not be employed when using the RSM-SF since the OSC signal in each di-
rection would employ the same wavelength, causing interference between
the signals. The protection provided by the module is modelled as an OM
facility FFP group.

Table 19-15: RSM-SF Optical Line Protection Configuration - OM Network Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
NA }
LEVEL R { OT } N/A N/A
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
The RSM-SF does not support any optical performance monitoring of the
optical line signals or continuity monitoring laser.
Table 19-16: RSM-SF Optical Line Protection Configuration - OM Network Facility Conditions
Condition


Table 19-16: RSM-SF Optical Line Protection Configuration - OM Network Facility Conditions
Condition

by the RSM-SF are summarized in the table below. In this release, there
are no Conditions or Performance Monitoring related registers or thresh-
olds associated with the protection group instance (although relevant
conditions do exist on the network facilities, as described above).
Table 19-17: RSM-SF Optical Line Protection Configuration - FFP-OM Attributes
Manual Auto-
Mechanism
Protection Group R { LINE } N/A N/A
Type

19.3 VSM
The VSM module is an optical switch module providing a general purpose
optical switching capability in ring or linear topologies. The module ac-
cepts a single optical fiber pair on the client side and 2 fiber pairs on the
network side, using the network side pairs as the redundant path seg-
ments. Signalling information is exchanged via the OSC (supported via
the 2OSCM module) between the nodes employing the VSM module for op-
tical protection switching so that the nodes may co-ordinate configura-
tion and switching information to achieve an orderly operation of the
redundant routing of the supported signals.
In the out-bound direction, an input DWDM line signal is split into two
optical paths with identical power levels (i.e. a 50/50 split). In the in-
bound direction, the optical signals from the two incoming fiber paths
are sent to an optical switch selecting which optical signal is sent to the
Network Element based upon the provisioned configuration and the net
effects of both manual and automatic protection switching triggers.
Table 19-18: VSM Optical Specifications

Optical Connector Type Duplex LC
Maximum insertion loss (client to network port) 1.6 dB
Wavelength range supported 1525 nm .. 1630 nm

bles:
Table 19-19: VSM EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE VSM VSM
string
string string.

Table 19-19: VSM EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the VSM#1310 if Channel=S1310 or
string equipment. VSM#1510 if Channel=S1510.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 19-20: VSM EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 19-21: VSM EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 19-21: VSM EQPT Conditions
Condition
19.3.2 VSM Supported Facilities

Table 19-22: VSM Supported Facility Configurations
Network
Port(s)

NE

The VSM module Optical Line Protection configuration supports redun-
dant fiber configurations in both ring and linear topologies. OSC signals
must be employed when using the VSM since the OSC signal is used to car-
ry information on the status of the supported channels and protection
switching status information related to the operational state of the VSM
modules within the network. The protection provided by the module is
modelled as an OM facility FFP group.


Table 19-23: VSM Optical Line Protection Configuration - OM Network Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
NA }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
The VSM does not support any optical performance monitoring of the op-
tical line signals.
Table 19-24: VSM Optical Line Protection Configuration - OM Network Facility Conditions
Condition


Table 19-24: VSM Optical Line Protection Configuration - OM Network Facility Conditions
Condition
Internal Link Failure NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA
Signal Fail Link Vector NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Link Vector SD NEND NA NA MJ Yes SA
Far End IP Unknown NEND NA NA MJ Yes SA

by the VSM are summarized in the table below. In this release, there are
no Conditions or Performance Monitoring related registers or thresholds
associated with the protection group instance (although relevant condi-
tions do exist on the network facilities, as described above).
Table 19-25: VSM Optical Line Protection Configuration - FFP-OM Attributes
Manual Auto-
Mechanism
Type
Signal Degrade RW { ENABLE | N/A
Switching DISABLE }
Signal Failure RE { ENABLE } N/A
Switching
Far End IP RW x.x.x.x, where x N/A
Address
PEER-AID RW { AID Value } N/A AID of the 2OSCM module providing
the communication of status
information for the protection
group.


Chapter 20
SCUs
20.1 “SCU”, p. 20-408
20.2 “SCU-E”, p. 20-413
FW7420 F7 Vol3 SCUs.fm
20.1 SCU
The SCU supports the control and monitoring functions for all equipment
and facilities within a primary shelf, including the communications link
to any supported extension shelf via the X port. The SCUs of all shelves
within a Network Element are linked in a redundant manner through the
2 inter-shelf communications links supported on the U and D ports of the
SCU modules.
The SCUs of the various shelves should be connected via their U and D
Ethernet ports in an arrangement which forms a physical ring. A typical
example would be to link the SHELF-1 SCU D port to the SHELF-2 SCU U
port, and then the SHELF-2 SCU D port to the SHELF-3 SCU U port and so
on, with the SCU D port in the last shelf within the NE connected to the
SHELF-1 SCU U port, thus forming a physical ring communication path.
This configuration provides redundancy of the inter-shelf communication
links should one of the interconnecting segments fail due to a cable fault
or a pluggable module failure.

bles:
)an
Table 20-1: SCU EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE SCU SCU
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string

string

Table 20-1: SCU EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the SCU
string equipment.
string
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 20-2: SCU EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 20-3: SCU EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 20-3: SCU EQPT Conditions
Condition
20.1.1.2 Plug Attributes

The SCU module employs SFP-G (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31) type plugs
on the U, D and X ports. Only one variant of this plug type is permitted,
and the use of any other type of plug will result in an equipment mis-
match condition unless the plug is equipped in an unprovisioned posi-
tion. The valid plug type permitted is:
Table 20-4: SCU Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment
SFP-G HS G850 INTRA E100FX on the X port, 1GBE
on the U and D ports.
20.1.2 SCU Supported Facilities

Table 20-5: SCU Supported Facility Configurations
U, D SH: 1GBE State, Physical
X SH: E100FX State, Physical
20.1.3 SCU Facility Configurations

The SCU does not have different configurations in the same manner as do
traffic the carrying modules. There are, however, certain cases which may
be characterized and which have differing minimal requirements for facil-
ity provisioning in order to ensure correct operation of the Network Ele-
ment:
• a single shelf NE configuration does not require the U or D ports on

the SCU to be physically equipped or to have the corresponding SH
type 1GBE facilities provisioned
• a primary shelf which does not support an extension shelf does not
require the X port on the SCU to be physically equipped or to have
the corresponding SH type E100FX facility provisioned
• a primary shelf which is a member in a multi-shelf NE must have at
least one of the U or D ports on the SCU properly equipped and the
corresponding SH type 1GBE facility provisioned in order for the NE
to access and control the shelf and its contained entities (e.g.
equipment, facilities, protection groups, etc.)
• a primary shelf which supports an extension shelf must have the X
port on the SCU properly equipped and the corresponding SH type
E100FX facility provisioned in order for the NE to access and control
the extension shelf and its contained entities
• it is recommended that a primary shelf which is a member of a
multi-shelf NE have both the U and D ports properly equipped and
the corresponding SH type 1GBE facilities provisioned in order to
provide the most robust inter-shelf communications capabilities
possible.
20.1.3.1 SH Facility Properties

Table 20-6: SCU Configurations - 1GBE Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 1GBE 1GBE This facility type will auto-provision
on the U and D ports.
string string.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 20-7: SCU Configurations - E100FX Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE E100FX E100FX This facility type will auto-provision
on the X port.
string string.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
The SCU does not support any facility PMs, even the physical layer PMs
OPR and OPT.
Table 20-8: SCU Configurations - E100FX/1GBE Facility Conditions
Condition

20.2 SCU-E
The SCU-E supports the control and monitoring functions for all equip-
ment and facilities within an extension shelf, including the communica-
tions link to the supporting primary shelf via the X port.

bles:
Table 20-9: SCU-E EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE SCU-E SCU-E
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the SCU-E
string equipment.
string

Table 20-9: SCU-E EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 20-10: SCU-E EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 20-11: SCU-E EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 20-11: SCU-E EQPT Conditions
Condition
20.2.1.2 Plug Attributes

The SCU-E module employs SFP-G (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31) type
plugs on X port. Only one variant of this plug type is permitted, and the
use of any other type of plug will result in an equipment mismatch con-
dition. The valid plug type permitted is:
Table 20-12: SCU-E Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment
SFP-G HS G850 INTRA E100FX on the X port.
20.2.2 SCU-E Supported Facilities

Table 20-13: SCU-E Supported Facility Configurations
X SH: E100FX State, Physical
20.2.3 SCU-E Facility Configurations

The SCU-E has a single configuration which supports a single facility type.
Details of the attributes associated with this facility are given in the fol-
lowing sections.

20.2.3.1 SH Facility Properties

Table 20-14: SCU-E Configuration - E100FX Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE E100FX E100FX This facility type will auto-provision
on the X port.
string string.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
The SCU-E does not support any facility PMs, even the physical layer PMs
OPR and OPT.
Table 20-15: SCU-E Configuration - E100FX Facility Conditions
Condition

Chapter 21
Shelves
This chapter contains the following shelves:
21.1 “SH1HU-DC”, p. 21-418
21.2 “SH7HU”, p. 21-421
FW7420 F7 Vol3 Shelves.fm
21.1 SH1HU-DC
The SH1HU-DC is a small height shelf for use within a Network Element
configuration (1.732” H x 19” W x 9.5” D). The slots within the shelf are
oriented in a horizontal plane, arranged in a 2x2 layout. When facing a
mounted shelf, the left most slots are designed to accept a half-height
style NCU, NCU2E, SCU and/or SCU-E modules, depending upon the role
of the shelf within the NE. The remaining 2 slots are full height slots and
may be used for any of the valid module types supported by the release.
Should a double-width module type be provisioned, physical space re-
quirements will demand that it be provisioned in the lower right hand
slot.
The shelf contains an integrated redundant pair of 3-fan modules, an as-
sociated fan controller, dual -48VDC power supplies, an LCD display show-
ing the assigned shelf number, status LEDs for each slot, a status LED for
the FAN assembly, push buttons for setting the shelf number and alarm
summary LEDs used to provide the Network Element alarm summary (CR,
MJ, MN active conditions) should the shelf contain an NCU/NCU2E module
and be acting as the NE master shelf.
A pictorial layout view of the shelf and the supported slot positions is giv-
en below, followed by an equipping guideline for the modules types re-
quired in the various configurations the shelf may support:
M O D- x
1-A 2 M O D-x
1 -2
FFAANN- C T R L
PPSSUU11 PPSSUU22 M O D-x
1-B 1 M O D-x
1 -1
S H E L F-x
1
Fig. 21-1: SH1HU-DC Shelf Layout showing slot AIDs
Table 21-1: SH1HU-DC Shelf Roles and Half-Height Slot Equipage
Role MOD-x-A Module Type MOD-x-B Module Type

Master Shelf NCU/NCU2E SCU
(i.e. x=1)
Main Shelf unused SCU
(i.e. x= {2 .. 20}
Extension Shelf unused SCU-E
(i.e. x={1E .. 20E}

21.1.1.1 Shelf Attributes

The attributes associated with this shelf, including their default values
bles:
Table 21-2: SH1HU-DC EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE SH1HU-DC SH1HU-DC
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the SH1HU/2DC
string equipment.
string
Rack RW 100 character The default value is a null
string string.
REAR } equipped
shelf
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 21-3: SH1HU-DC EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Table 21-4: SH1HU-DC EQPT Conditions
Condition
FAN Abnormal NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
FAN Fault NEND NA NA MJ Yes NSA

21.2 SH7HU
The SH7HU is a full height shelf for use within a Network Element config-
uration (12.25” H x 19” W x 9.5” D). The shelf contains 23 slots, including
one dedicated to the fan assembly, 2 half-height slots on the left side
(viewed when facing a mounted shelf) and 20 full height slots in a hori-
zontal row. When facing a mounted shelf, the left most slots are designed
to accept half-height style NCU, NCU2E, SCU and/or SCU-E modules, de-
pending upon the role of the shelf within the NE. The full height slots
may be used for any of the valid module types supported by the release.
Should a double-width module type be provisioned, physical space re-
quirements will preclude it from being provisioned in the furthest right
slot (slot 20).
Two variants are available, providing either front or rear access power
supply connections. The front supply type shelf must be used with the
front supply type power modules while the rear supply type shelf must be
used with the rear supply type power modules.
A pictorial layout view of the shelf and the supported slot positions is giv-
en below, followed by an equipping guideline for the modules types re-
quired in the various configurations the shelf may support:
Fig. 21-2: SH7HU Shelf Layout showing example AIDs
FCU-1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
M
O
D
- M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M M
1 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O
- D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D D
A - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
M 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
O - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
D 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
-
1
-
B
SHELF-1

Table 21-5: SH7HU Front Supply Shelf Roles and Slot Equipage
Role Slot Position Module Type

Master Shelf MOD-1-A NCU/NCU2E
MOD-1-B SCU
FCU-1 FCU7HU
MOD-1-1 (recommended) PSU7HU-AC or PSU7HU-DC (Front Supply Type)
MOD-1-19 (recommended) PSU7HU-DC (Front Supply Type
if another slot also holds a PSU7HU-DC)
Main Shelf MOD-x-A unused
(i.e. x= {2 .. 20} MOD-x-B SCU
FCU-x FCU7HU
MOD-x-1 (recommended) PSU7HU-AC or PSU7HU-DC (Front Supply Type)
MOD-x-19 (recommended) PSU7HU-DC (Front Supply Type
if another slot also holds a PSU7HU-DC)
Extension Shelf MOD-x-A unused
(i.e. x={1E .. 20E} MOD-x-B SCU-E
FCU-x FCU7HU
MOD-x-1 OR MOD-x-19 PSU7HU-ACa or PSU7HU-DC
a. It is recommended that the PSU7HU-AC type module is provisioned in slot 1 when used.
Table 21-6: SH7HU Rear Supply Shelf Roles and Slot Equipage
Role Slot Position Module Type

Master Shelf MOD-1-A NCU/NCU2E
MOD-1-B SCU
FCU-1 FCU7HU
MOD-1-1 (required) PSU7HU-DC (Rear Supply Type)
MOD-1-19 (required) PSU7HU-DC (Rear Supply Type)
Main Shelf MOD-x-A unused
(i.e. x= {2 .. 20} MOD-x-B SCU
FCU-x FCU7HU
MOD-x-1 (required) PSU7HU-DC (Rear Supply Type)
MOD-x-19 (required) PSU7HU-DC (Rear Supply Type)
Extension Shelf MOD-x-A unused
(i.e. x={1E .. 20E} MOD-x-B SCU-E
FCU-x FCU7HU
MOD-x-1 OR MOD-x-19 (one is PSU7HU-DC (Rear supply type)

required)

21.2.1.1 Shelf Attributes

The attributes associated with this shelf, including their default values
bles:
Table 21-7: SH7HU EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE SH7HU SH7HU
string
string string.
Revision string
Revision string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the SH7HU if SUPPLY=FRONT,
string equipment. SH7HU-R if SUPPLY=REAR.
string
Rack RW 100 character The default value is a null
string string.
REAR } equipped
shelf
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 21-8: SH7HU EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Power Output NEND NA NA Integer No thresholds defined.
Power NEND NA NA Integer No thresholds defined.
Consumption
Table 21-9: SH7HU EQPT Conditions
Condition
Power Unit Missing NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA FW7420 F7 Vol3 Shelves.fm

Chapter 22
WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D
The WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D module is a transponder supporting a limited
set of rates in the 10 Gigabit/s range with one network facility. It is able
to perform a simple bi-directional transponder function, or to be config-
ured as a uni-directional regenerator.
On the network side, the module supports a single port using integrated
optics. The wavelength and reach of the network port are determined by
the variant of the module which is equipped, with the WCA10G-C modules
containing CWDM compatible network interfaces with a VLONG reach,
while the WCA10G-D versions include DWDM compatible network interfac-
es with a VLONG reach. In all cases, the network facility behavior will be
to turn off the laser when the associated received signal driving the net-
work facility output fails - this is equivalent to the network facility pos-
sessing the attribute Error Forwarding Mode with a value of LSROFF.
On the client side, the single port supports a bi-directional facility using
an XFP-G sub-module operating at a 10G rate when configured to operate
as a transponder. If the module is configured as a uni-directional regen-
erator (Transmission Mode=REGEN1WAY), the client port may not be pro-
visioned and need not be equipped.
The facility types on all of the provisioned ports must be the same. The
module supports discrete rate bit-transparent signals at rates of 9.953
Gbps (compatible with OC-192 and STM-64 signals), 10.312 Gbps (com-
patible with 10GbE signals) or 10.518 Gbps (compatible with 10GFC sig-
nals). In the regenerator configuration the module also supports an
F10709 facility type, which allows it to operate as a physical layer regen-
erator for G.709 compatible signal types.
FW7420 F7 Vol3 WCA10G.fm

bles:
Table 22-1: WCA10G-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCA10G-C WCA10G-C
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCA-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx where Cxxxx is
string equipment. equal to the value of the Channel
attribute.
string
Channel RE { C1530 | see comment During auto-provisioning the value
C1550 | C1570 | matching the inserted module will
C1590 } be used.
Transmission RE { TRANS | TRANS TRANS Determines which sub-modules and
Mode REGEN1WAY } facilities may be provisioned.
TRANS allows the client port plus
the network port, REGEN1WAY
allows the network port only.

Table 22-1: WCA10G-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 22-2: WCA10G-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCA10G-D WCA10G-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCA-PC-10G-V#Dxx where Dxx is
attribute.
string

.. DL9 } be used.

Table 22-2: WCA10G-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Transmission RE { TRANS | TRANS TRANS Determines which sub-modules and
Mode REGEN1WAY } facilities may be provisioned.
TRANS allows the client port plus
the network port, REGEN1WAY
allows the network port only.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 22-3: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 22-4: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 22-4: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

The type of client side plugs permitted on this module are XFP-G 10G rate
plugs (Section 2.5 “XFP-G”, p. 2-33). The set of valid plug types permitted
Table 22-5: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Client Side Supported Plugs and
Facilities
Equipment
XFP-G 10G G850 INTRA F9953, F10312, F10518
XFP-G 10G G1310 SHORT F9953, F10312, F10518
XFP-G 10G G1550 LONG F9953, F10312, F10518

22.2 WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Supported Facilities

Table 22-6: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility
Attribute Dependencies Type Supported Layers Facility Type Supported Layers
MODE=TRANS C CH:F9953 State, Operations, N CH:F9953 State, Operations,
Physical Physical
Physical Physical
Physical Physical
MODE=REGEN1WAY C Not usable in this configuration. N CH:F9953 or State, Operations,
CH:F10312 or Physical
CH:F10518 or
CH:F10709

The WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D module Transponder configuration is used to
adapt a client side signal which is a broad spectrum optical signal into a
CWDM or DWDM compatible optical signal for transport. Since the module
does not perform multiplexing, the type of the client and network side
facilities must be the same.
In the Transponder configuration, the network side facility will always
operate with automatic laser safety features enabled.
Due to the rule that the client facility must be the same type as the net-
work facility, the second facility instance will only auto-provisioning if
the first is of the default type (i.e. F10312).

Table 22-7: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Transponder Configuration - Network Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F9953, F10312, F10312
F10518
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
ALS Mode R { NONE | ALS } N/A N/A NONE if equipment mode is a
regenerator, otherwise ALS.

Table 22-7: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Transponder Configuration - Network Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 22-8: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Transponder Configuration - Network Facility PMs (All Facility
Types)
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
OPR-HT -23.0 -8.0 -8.0
For WCC10G-D module only:
Laser TEMP NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 No thresholds defined.
Table 22-9: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Transponder Configuration - Network Facility Conditions (All

Types)
Condition


Table 22-9: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Transponder Configuration - Network Facility Conditions (All
Types)
Condition

Since this module is a transponder, the types of client facilities are iden-
tical to those supported on the network side. In most cases, the set of
attributes, PM registers and conditions are also identical, but there are a
few exceptions - for brevity, only the differences are listed here.
• ALS operation is not supported on the client side of the module, so
none of the client facilities will support the condition Auto
Shutdown (ALS)
• the Rx Clock Sync Failure condition is not supported on the client
side of the module, so none of the client facilities will support this
condition
• the client side facilities posses one modified attribute, as follows:
Table 22-10: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Transponder Configuration - F10312/F10518 Client Facility
Modified Attributes
Manual Auto-
Error Forwarding Rw { LSROFF } LSROFF LSROFFa
Mode
a. Applies to F10312 facility type - F10518 does not auto-provision.

Table 22-11: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Transponder Configuration - F9953 Client Facility Modified

Attributes
Manual Auto-
Error Forwarding Rw { LSRBRK | LSROFF N/A
Mode LSROFF }
• the client side facilities posses an additional PM register and

associated threshold levels for optical transmit power, and the
optical receive related PM properties change along with these since
the values are dependant upon the type of XFP-G module used, as
follows:
Table 22-12: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Transponder Configuration - Client Facility Additional PMs
(All Types)
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
if Plug Equipment Type=XFP-G and Rate=11G and Reach=SHORT
Rx
OPR-HT -13.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -10.0 0.5 -10.0
Rx
OPR-HT -10.0 0.5 0.5
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=XFP-G and Rate=10G and Reach=INTRA
Rx
OPR-HT -11.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=XFP-G and Rate=10G or 11G and Reach=LONG
Rx
OPR-HT -11.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx

• the set of condition supported is expanded to include the threshold
crossing conditions for the added PM capabilities, as follows:
Table 22-13: WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D Transponder Configuration - Client Facility Additional
Conditions (All Types)
Condition

22.4 Uni-directional Regenerator Configuration

When the module is provisioned with Transmission Mode = REGEN1WAY,
the WCA10G-C/WCA10G-D module will operate as a uni-directional signal
regenerator for one of the facility types supported by the Transponder
configuration, namely for an F9953, an F10312, an F10518 or an F10709
facility instance. The regenerator configuration employs only the receive
and transmit network ports to perform the uni-directional regeneration of
the signal. Any attempts to provision the client side port or associated
facilities will be denied in this configuration, although it is still possible
to query the inventory attributes of any pluggable modules inserted in
that position.
The set of attributes, PM registers and thresholds, and conditions for the
facility types supported in this configuration are identical to those de-
scribed above in Section 22.3.1 “Network Facility Properties”, p. 22-431,
with the following exceptions:
• the F10709 facility type is also supported, with properties identical
to those of the F9953, F10312 and F10518 facility types, as
described above, except for the Error Forwarding Mode attribute
which is not supported,
• there is no auto-provisioning default for the facility type - the type
of signal to be regenerated must be manually provisioned,
• the facility will not perform ALS operation, and will not possess the
associated condition Auto Shutdown (ALS).

Chapter 23
WCA2G5
The WCA2G5 module is a multi-rate transponder with either one or two
network facilities. It is able to perform a simple bi-directional transpon-
der function, to operate as a bi-directional transponder with network fa-
cility protection, or to be configured as a bi-directional regenerator.
operation of either a network protected configuration or a regenerator
configuration, otherwise only one port need be equipped. If the plugs
used on the network side are SFP-G type, a further stage of multiplexing
is implied before the signal is transported over the network line - in this
case, it is recommended (but the system does not enforce) that the TRAN-
SHST mode (i.e. the Network Protected configuration) not be used, due
to the potential for operational issues which may arise if the further mul-
tiplexing stage employs some form of facility protection mechanism.
an SFP sub-module.
The facility types on all of the provisioned ports must be the same. The
module supports a range of discrete rate bit-transparent signals at rates
from 125 Mbps up to 2488 Mbps, or a rate adaptive mode which allows
the module to automatically adjust to and operate with a signal whose
rate is within this same range.
FW7420 F7 Vol3 WCA2G5.fm

bles:
Table 23-1: WCA2G5 EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCA2G5 WCA2G5
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCA-PCN-2G5U
string equipment.
string
Transmission RE { REGEN2WAY | TRANSHST TRANSHST Determines which sub-modules
Mode TRANSE | and facilities may be provisioned.
TRANSW | TRANSE allows the client port plus
TRANSHST } the NE network port, TRANSW
allows the client port plus the NW
network port, TRANSHST allows all
ports on the client and network
sides, REGEN2WAY allows the two
network ports.

Table 23-1: WCA2G5 EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 23-2: WCA2G5 EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 23-3: WCA2G5 EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 23-3: WCA2G5 EQPT Conditions
Condition

sioned, the behavior will be to allow any of the SFPs listed below to be
equipped without raising a mismatch condition. An Data Rate Not Sup-
ported condition will be raised by the facility whenever the corresponding
equipped plug type is unable to support that facility type but an equip-
ment level mismatch condition does not exist. The set of valid plug types
permitted on the network ports are:
Table 23-4: WCA2G5 Network Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment Auto-provisioning
Type Rate Channel Reach Supported Facility Types Default Facility Type
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx VLONG F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, F2488
F1250, F2125, F2488, ADAPT, ADAPTD
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx LONG F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, F2488
SFP-C FE C1510 ULONG F125 F125
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx VLONG F155, F622, F1062, F1250, F2125, F2488
F2488, ADAPT, ADAPTD
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx ULONG F155, F622, F1062, F1250, F2125, F2488
F2488, ADAPT, ADAPTD
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 LONG F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, F2488
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 SHORT F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, F2488
SFP-G 2G1 G850 INTRA F1062, F1250, F2125, ADAPT, ADAPTD F2125
SFP-G HS G1310 SHORT F1062, F1250, ADAPT, ADAPTD F1062
SFP-G HS G850 INTRA F125, F1062, F1250, ADAPT, ADAPTD F1062
SFP-G CL G1310 INTRA F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, CL
F1250, F2125, F2488, ADAPT,
ADAPTD, CL

2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24), SFP-G (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31) and SFP-E (Sec-
tion 2.3 “SFP-E”, p. 2-29). If the Rate attribute value ANY is provisioned,
the behavior will be to allow any of the SFPs listed below to be equipped
without raising a mismatch condition. An Data Rate Not Supported con-
dition will be raised by the facility whenever the corresponding equipped
plug type is unable to support that facility type but an equipment level
mismatch condition does not exist. The set of valid plug types permitted
Table 23-5: WCA2G5 Client Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment Auto-provisioning
Type Rate Channel Reach Supported Facility Types Default Facility Type
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx VLong F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, F2488
SFP-C 2G5 Cxxxx Long F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, F2488
SFP-E GBE N/A N/A F1250 F1250
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 LONG F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, F2488
SFP-G 2G5 G1310 SHORT F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, F2488
SFP-G 2G1 G850 INTRA F1062, F1250, F2125, ADAPT, ADAPTD F2125
SFP-G HS G1310 SHORT F1062, F1250, ADAPT, ADAPTD F1062
SFP-G HS G850 INTRA F125, F1062, F1250, ADAPT, ADAPTD F1062
SFP-G CL G1310 INTRA F125, F155, F200, F622, F1062, CL
F1250, F2125, F2488, ADAPT,
ADAPTD, CL

23.2 WCA2G5 Supported Facilities

Table 23-6: WCA2G5 Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
MODE=TRANSW and (client C CH:F125 State, Operations, NW CH:F125 State, Operations,
plug RATE={CL | HS | 2G5 | Physical Physical
ANY} and TYPE=SFP-G) and
(network plug (TYPE=SFP-C
and RATE={2G5 | FE | ANY}) or
(TYPE=SFP-G and RATE={CL |
HSa | 2G5 | ANY}))
plug RATE={CL | 2G5 | ANY} Physical Physical
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
(network plug (TYPE={SFP-C |
SFP-D} and RATE={2G5 |
ANY}) or (TYPE=SFP-G and
RATE={CL | 2G5 | ANY}))
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
and RATE={2G5 | ANY}) or
2G5 | ANY}))
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
plug RATE={CL | 2G5 | 2G1 | Physical Physical
HS | ANY} and TYPE=SFP-G)
and (network plug
(TYPE={SFP-C | SFP-D} and
RATE={2G5 | ANY}) or
2G5 | 2G1 | HS | ANY}))
plug (RATE={CL | 2G5 | 2G1 | Physical Physical
HS | ANY} and TYPE=SFP-G) or
(RATE=GBE and TYPE=SPF=E))
and (network plug
2G5 | 2G1 | HS | ANY}))

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
RATE={CL | 2G5 | 2G1 | ANY}))
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
MODE=TRANSW and RATE={CL C CH:CL State, Operations, NW CH:CL State, Operations,
| ANY} and TYPE=SFP-G for Physical Physical
both Client and network
plugs.
MODE=TRANSW and (client C CH:ADAPT State, Operations, NW CH:ADAPT State, Operations,
and (network plug
(TYPE={SFP-C | SFP-D} and C CH:ADAPTD State, Operations, NW CH:ADAPTD State, Operations,
RATE={2G5 | ANY}) or Physical Physical
2G5 | 2G1 | HS | ANY}))
MODE=TRANSE and (client C CH:F125 State, Operations, NE CH:F125 State, Operations,
plug RATE={CL | HS | 2G5 | Physical Physical
HS<Superscript>a | 2G5 |
ANY}))
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
and TYPE=SFP-G) and

2G5 | ANY}))

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
and (network plug
2G5 | 2G1 | HS | ANY}))
plug (RATE={CL | 2G5 | 2G1 | Physical Physical
and (network plug
2G5 | 2G1 | HS | ANY}))
RATE={CL | 2G5 | 2G1 | ANY}))
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
MODE=TRANSE and RATE={CL | C CH:CL State, Operations, NE CH:CL State, Operations,
ANY} and TYPE=SFP-G for both Physical Physical
Client and network plugs.

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
MODE=TRANSE and (client C CH:ADAPT State, Operations, NE CH:ADAPT State, Operations,
and (network plug
(TYPE={SFP-C | SFP-D} and C CH:ADAPTD State, Operations, NE CH:ADAPTD State, Operations,
RATE={2G5 | ANY}) or Physical Physical
2G5 | 2G1 | HS | ANY}))
MODE=TRANSHST and (client C CH:F125 State, Operations, NW, CH:F125 State, Protection,
plug RATE={CL | HS | 2G5 | Physical NE Physical
HS<Superscript>a | 2G5 |
ANY}))
plug RATE={CL | 2G5 | ANY} Physical NE Physical
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
2G5 | ANY}))
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
plug RATE={CL | 2G5 | 2G1 | Physical NE Physical
and (network plug
2G5 | 2G1 | HS | ANY}))

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
plug (RATE={CL | 2G5 | 2G1 | Physical NE Physical
and (network plug
2G5 | 2G1 | HS | ANY}))
RATE={CL | 2G5 | 2G1 | ANY}))
and TYPE=SFP-G) and
MODE=TRANSHST and C CH:CL State, Operations, NW, CH:CL State, Protection,
RATE={CL | ANY} and Physical NE Physical
TYPE=SFP-G for both Client
and network plugs.
MODE=TRANSHST and (client C CH:ADAPT State, Operations, NW, CH:ADAPT State, Protection,
and (network plug
RATE={2G5 | ANY}) or C CH:ADAPTD State, Operations, NW, CH:ADAPTD State, Operations,
(TYPE=SFP-G and RATE={CL | Physical NE Protection,
2G5 | 2G1 | HS | ANY})) Physical
MODE = REGEN2WAY and Not usable in this configuration. NW, CH:F125 State, Operations,
network plug (TYPE=SFP-C and NE Physical
RATE=(2G5 | FE | ANY)) or
(TYPE=SFP-G and RATE={2G5 |
HS<Superscript>a | CL | ANY})
network plug (TYPE=[SFP-C | NE Physical
SFP-D} and RATE=(2G5 or
ANY)) or (TYPE=SFP-G and
RATE={2G5 | CL | ANY})

Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facility Facility
network plug (TYPE=SFP-C and NE Physical
RATE=(2G5 or ANY)) or
(TYPE=SFP-G and RATE={2G5 |
CL | ANY})
network plug (TYPE=[SFP-C | NE Physical
SFP-D} and RATE=(2G5 or
ANY)) or (TYPE=SFP-G and
RATE={2G5 | CL | ANY})
MODE=REGEN2WAY Not usable in this configuration. NW, CH:F1062 State, Operations,
NE Physical
MODE=REGEN2WAY Not usable in this configuration. NW, CH:F1250 State, Operations,
NE Physical
MODE=REGEN2WAY and Not usable in this configuration. NW, CH:F2125 State, Operations,
(RATE=(2G5 | ANY) and NE Physical
TYPE={SFP-C | SFP-D | SFP-G})
or
(RATE={2G1 | CL} and
TYPE=SFP-G)
MODE=REGEN2WAY and Not usable in this configuration. NW, CH:F2488 State, Operations,
(RATE=(2G5 | ANY) and NE Physical
TYPE={SFP-C | SFP-D | SFP-G})
or
(RATE=CL and TYPE=SFP-G)
MODE=REGEN2WAY Not usable in this configuration. NW, CH:ADAPT State, Operations,
NE Physical
Not usable in this configuration. NW, CH:ADAPTD State, Operations,
NE Physical
a. Only the G850 channel variant of the SFP-G RATE=HS plug is valid in this case.


The WCA2G5 module Transponder configuration is used to adapt a client
side signal which is either an electrical interface into a broad spectrum
optical signal for subsequent multiplexing, an electrical signal into a
CWDM or DWDM compatible optical signal for transport, or a broad spec-
trum optical signal into a CWDM or DWDM compatible optical signal for
transport. Since the module does not perform multiplexing, the type of
the client and network side facilities must be the same. No on-board pro-
tection switching capabilities are supported in this configuration - if net-
work channel protection services are required, the configuration
described in Section 23.4 “Network Protected Transponder Configuration”,
p. 23-463 should be used instead.
In the Transponder configuration, only one of the two network side ports
is used to support a facility - any attempt to provision the other port will
be denied. The supported port is determined by the modules EQPT prop-
erty Transmission Mode - if the value is TRANSE, the NE port and facility
are supported while if the value is TRANSW, the NW port and facility are
supported. The network side facility will always operate with automatic
laser safety features enabled in this configuration unless the plug is an
SFP-G type, in which case ALS operation is not possible.
Due to the rule that the client facility must be the same type as the net-
work facility, the auto-provisioning behavior will be that the type of the
first facility created will follow the rules described below, while the sec-
ond instance will only auto-provision if the type suggested by the plug
matches that of the existing facility instance.

Table 23-7: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - CL/F1062/F1250/F2488 Network Side Facility
Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE CL/F1062/F125 see
0/F2488 Table 23-4,
p. 23-440
string string.
| NA }
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
ALS Mode R { ALS | NONE } N/A N/A NONE if equipment mode is a
regenerator, or if Grey type plug is
used in TRANSE or TRANSW mode,
otherwise ALS.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 23-8: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - F125/F155/F200/F622/F2125 Network Side

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F125/F155/F20 see
0/F622/F2125 Table 23-4,
p. 23-440
string string.
NA }
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
otherwise ALS.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 23-9: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - ADAPT/ADAPTD Network Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE ADAPT/ADAPTD see
Table 23-4,
p. 23-440
string string.
NA }
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
otherwise ALS.
Datarate R { 125 | 155 | N/A N/A Reflects the bit rate of the signal
200 | 622 | being carried.
1062 | 1250 |
2125 | 2488 }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 23-10: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - Network Facility PMs (All Facility Types)
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Seconds
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-C and Rate=FE and Reach=ULONG
Rx
OPR-HT -40.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0

Table 23-10: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - Network Facility PMs (All Facility Types)
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -19.0 -3.0-3 -27.0 if below 622
Rx Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Table 23-11: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - Network Facility Conditions (All Types)
Condition
For F125, F155, F200, F622 F2125, F2488 and CL Only:

tical to those supported on the network side.
Table 23-12: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - CL/F1062/F1250 Client Side Facility
Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE CL/F1062/F125 see
0 Table 23-4,
p. 23-440
string string.


Table 23-12: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - CL/F1062/F1250 Client Side Facility
Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Error Forwarding Rw { LSROFF } LSROFF LSROFF
Mode
Table 23-13: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - F2488 Client Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F2488 see
Table 23-4,
p. 23-440
string string.

Table 23-13: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - F2488 Client Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
direction.
nanometers..
Error Forwarding Rw { lsrBrk | lsrOff lsrOff
Mode lsrOff }
ALS Mode R { ALS | NONE } see comment see comment Client side is always NONE. Network
side is NONE if equipment is
operating in regenerator mode or if
a Grey type plug is used in either
TRANSE or TRANSW mode,
otherwise the value will be ALS.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 23-14: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - F125/F200/F2125 Client Side Facility

Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F125/F200/F21 see
25 Table 23-4,
p. 23-440
string string.

Table 23-14: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - F125/F200/F2125 Client Side Facility
Attributes
Manual Auto-
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 23-15: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - F155/F622 Client Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE F155/F622 see
Table 23-4,
p. 23-440
string string.

Table 23-15: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - F155/F622 Client Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
direction.
nanometers..
Error Forwarding Rw { LSRBRK | LSROFF LSROFF
Mode LSROFF }
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 23-16: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - ADAPT/ADAPTDa Client Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE ADAPT/ADAPTD see
Table 23-4,
p. 23-440
string string.

Table 23-16: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - ADAPT/ADAPTDa Client Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
Datarate R { 125 | 155 | N/A N/A Reflects the bit rate of the signal
200 | 622 | being carried.
1062 | 1250 |
2125 | 2488 }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
a. Although these facility types do not possess the ALS Mode attribute, ALS operation will occur unless the supporting
plug is an SFP-G type, in which case it will not..
Table 23-17: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - Client Facility PMs (All Facility Types)
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Seconds
The following attributes do not exist if an SFP-E type plug is used:


Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
if Plug Equipment Type=SFP-C and Rate=FE and Reach=ULONG
Rx
OPR-HT -40.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -15.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -19.0 -3.0-3 -27.0 if below 622
Rx Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Table 23-18: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - Client Facility Conditions (All Types)
Condition


Table 23-18: WCA2G5 Transponder Configuration - Client Facility Conditions (All Types)
Condition
For all types except F1250:
Laser Forced ONa NEND TRMT NA NA Yes NSA

a. A forced override operation cannot be performed upon the facility if it is supported by an SFP-E pluggable module

23.4 Network Protected Transponder Configuration
An extension of the Transponder configuration is also available on the
WCA2G5 module which supports not one but two network side facilities
with protection switching capabilities, all integrated on the module. This
variant is selected by setting the modules EQPT attribute Transmission
Mode to the value TRANSHST, which is the default mode for auto-provi-
sioning.
ing or protection member. The network facilities in this configuration will
always perform automatic laser safety functions, regardless of the type of
SFP module used. The client side facilities all follow exactly the same
rules as in the unprotected Transponder configuration.
described above in Section 23.3 “Transponder Configuration”, p. 23-448
apply with the same values, defaults and auto-provisioning behavior.
Therefore, to avoid repetition, only the specific properties which are add-
ed or modified in this configuration relative to these previously stated
values will be described in the following sub-sections. Since this config-
uration adds the ability to provision a protection group, all of the prop-
erties of the protection group will be defined in the relevant sub-section
below.

erties”, p. 23-449 there are two difference in facility attribute values, no
differences in the Performance Monitoring register and threshold defini-
tions, several changes to the properties of the facility conditions and sev-
eral additional conditions due to their ability to be configured as a
member of a protection group, as indicated in the tables below:
Table 23-19: WCA2G5 Protected Transponder Configuration - Network Facility Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-
group.
For the CL/F1062/F1250/F2488 facility types:

ALS Mode R ALS N/A N/A In this configuration, the network
facilities mode will always be ALS.

Table 23-20: WCA2G5 Protected Transponder Configuration - Network Facility Modified

Condition
For F125, F155, F200, F622 F2125, F2488 and CL Only:
Data Rate Not Supported NEND NA NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
Table 23-21: WCA2G5 Protected Transponder Configuration - Additional Network Facility

Conditions
Condition

The support of a network protection group on the WCA2G5 module is

Table 23-22: WCA2G5 Protected Transponder Configuration - FFP-CH Attributes
Manual Auto-
Mechanism
Type

23.5 Bi-Directional Regenerator

The WCA2G5 module is able to operate as a bi-directional regenerator us-
ing the 2 network ports. In this configuration, the client port is unused
and need not be equipped. The network ports may be provisioned and
equipped with different types of SFP pluggable modules, but must both
be provisioned with the same facility type.
The facility types supported and their associated properties are as de-
scribed in 23.3 “Transponder Configuration” on page 448, with the excep-
tion that the following additional conditions are also supported:
Table 23-23: WCA2G5 Bi-directional Regenerator Configuration - Additional Network Facility
Condition

Chapter 24
WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D
The WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D module is a bi-directional single
channel transponder supporting multiple different facilities with rates in
the 10 Gigabit/s range. The module is able to support facilities of the
same type on both sides, or may be configured to adapt between non-OTN
client signals and the appropriate OTN or OTN-like network signal.
On the network side, the module supports a single port using integrated
optics. The wavelength and reach of the network port are determined by
the variant of the module which is equipped, with the WCC10G-C modules
containing CWDM compatible network interfaces with a VLONG reach,
while the WCC10G-D versions include DWDM compatible network interfac-
es with either a ULONG or VLONG reach. The WCC10GT-D modules include
a tunable wavelength laser with a VLONG reach supporting the network
interface. In all cases, the network facility operates with automatic laser
safety features.
an XFP-G sub-module (Section 2.5 “XFP-G”, p. 2-33) operating at either a
10G or 11G rate.
By default, the module will auto-provision with a client facility type of
10GBE and a network facility type of OTU2LAN. If the plug is not equipped
at the time the module is first installed, or if the network facility has been
manually provisioned to be an OTU2LAN type, the client facility will auto-
provision as a 10GBE type when a plug is inserted and auto-provisioning
is enabled.
FW7420 F7 Vol3 WCC10G.fm

bles:
Table 24-1: WCC10G-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCC10G-C WCC10G-C
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCC-PC-10G-V#Cxxxx where Cxxxx is
attribute.
string
C1590 } be used.
Transmission RE { TRANS } TRANS TRANS
Mode
Deployment RE { GENERIC | GENERIC GENERIC
Scenario CLIENTP }

Table 24-1: WCC10G-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 24-2: WCC10G-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCC10G-D WCC10G-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx where Dxx is
attribute if Reach=VLONG,.
WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx where Dxx is
equal to the value of the Channel
attribute if Reach=ULONG.

string

Table 24-2: WCC10G-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
.. DL9 } be used.
Reach RE { ULONG | see comment During auto-provisioning the value
VLONG } matching the inserted module will
be used.
Mode
Scenario CLIENTP }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 24-3: WCC10GT-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCC10GT-D WCC10GT-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string

Table 24-3: WCC10GT-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCC-PC-10G-V#Dxx where Dxx is
attribute if Reach=VLONG,.
WCC-PC-10G-U#Dxx where Dxx is
equal to the value of the Channel
attribute if Reach=ULONG.
string
Reach RE { VLONG | VLONG VLONG
LONG-NR }
Mode
Scenario CLIENTP }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 24-4: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Table 24-5: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

The type of client side plugs permitted on this module are XFP-G 10G and
11G rate plugs (Section 2.5 “XFP-G”, p. 2-33). The set of valid plug types
permitted on the client ports and the associated facility types allowed
are:
Table 24-6: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Client Side Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment
XFP-G 10G G850 INTRA OC192, STM64, 10GBE, 10GFC
XFP-G 10G G1310 SHORT OC192, STM64, 10GBE, 10GFC, OTU2
XFP-G 10G G1550 LONG OC192, STM64, 10GBE, 10GFC, OTU2
XFP-G 11G G1310 SHORT OC192, STM64, 10GBE, 10GFC, OTU2, OTU2LAN
XFP-G 11G G1550 LONG OC192, STM64, 10GBE, 10GFC, OTU2, OTU2LAN

24.2 WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Supported
Facilities
Table 24-7: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Attribute
MODE=TRANS, C CH:OC192 State, Operations, N CH:OC192 State, Operations,
TERM=SECTION Protection, Physical, Protection, Physical,
OC192-S OC192-S
DCN:SDCC State DCN:SDCC State
MODE=TRANS, C CH:STM64 State, Operations, N CH:STM64 State, Operations,
TERM=SECTION Protection, Physical, Protection, Physical,
STM64-RS STM64-RS
MODE=TRANS, C CH:OC192 State, Operations, N CH:OC192 State, Operations,
TERM=PHYS Protection, Physical Protection, Physical
MODE=TRANS, C CH:STM64 State, Operations, N CH:STM64 State, Operations,

TERM=PHYS Protection, Physical Protection, Physical
MODE=TRANS C CH:10GBE State, Physical, 10GBE N CH:10GBE State, Physical, 10GBE

MODE=TRANS C CH:10GFC State, Physical, 10GFC N CH:10GFC State, Physical, 10GFC
MODE=TRANS, C CH:OTU2LAN State, Operations, N CH:OTU2LAN State, Operations,
TERM=OTU Protection, Physical, Protection, Physical,
OTU2, TCMi OTU2, TCMi
GCC0S | GCC1 GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2 | GCC2
MODE=TRANS, C CH:OTU2 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
TERM=OTU Protection, Physical, Protection, Physical,
OTU2, TCMi OTU2, TCMi
GCC0S | GCC1 GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2 | GCC2
MODE=TRANS, C CH:10GBE State, Operations, N CH:OTU2LAN State, Operations,
(N Port) TERM=OPU Protection, Physical, Protection, Physical,
10GBE OTU2, TCMi, ODU2,
OPU2
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2

Table 24-7: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Attribute
MODE=TRANS, C CH:OC192 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
(N Port) Protection, Physical, Protection, Physical,
TERM=OPU, OC192-S OTU2, TCMi, ODU2,
(C Port) OPU2
TERM=SECTION DCN:SDCC State DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
MODE=TRANS, C CH:STM64 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
(N Port) Protection, Physical, Protection, Physical,
TERM=OPU, STM64-RS OTU2, TCMi, ODU2,
(C Port) OPU2
TERM=SECTION DCN:SDCC State DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
MODE=TRANS, C CH:OC192 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
(N Port) Protection, Physical Protection, Physical,
TERM=OPU, OTU2, TCMi, ODU2,
(C Port) OPU2
TERM=PHYS DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2
MODE=TRANS, C CH:STM64 State, Operations, N CH:OTU2 State, Operations,
(N Port) Protection, Physical Protection, Physical,
TERM=OPU, OTU2, TCMi, ODU2,
(C Port) OPU2
TERM=PHYS DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S | GCC1
| GCC2

24.3 Data Services Transponder Configuration
The WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D module Data Services transponder
configuration adapts a client side 10GBE or 10GFC broad spectrum optical
signal into a like type CWDM or DWDM compatible optical signal for trans-
port.

Table 24-8: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Data Services Transponder Configuration - 10GBE
Network Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 10GBE N/A
string string.
Protection Role R { WKG | PROTN | NA N/A
NA }
nanometers..
Mode
ALS Mode Rw { NONE | ALS } ALS N/A NONE applies only if the DWDM
Band.
deployed in back-to-back or client
protection modes.


Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Applies to WCC10G-C and WCC10G-D modules only:
is operating.
direction.
Applies to WCC10GT-D modules only:
Table 24-9: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Data Services Transponder Configuration - 10GFC

Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 10GFC N/A
string string.
NA }

Manual Auto-
nanometers..
Mode
Band.
protection modes.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
is operating.
direction.


Network Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
PCS Synch NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Header Errors
Rx
OPR-HT -22.0 -8.0 -8.0
from
module.
from
module.
LSRTEMP-FHT N/A N/A Read
from
module.

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx Frames NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
PAUSE Frames NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Received
Rx CRC Errors NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Rx Bytes NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.


Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Header Errors
Rx
OPR-HT -22.0 -8.0 -8.0
module.
Laser TEMP NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 LSRTEMP-FLT N/A N/A Read from
module.
LSRTEMP-FHT N/A N/A Read from
module.
Table 24-12: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Data Services Transponder Configuration -

Network Facility Conditions (All Types)
Condition


Table 24-12: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Data Services Transponder Configuration -

Network Facility Conditions (All Types)
Condition

Client Side Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 10GBE see
introductory
text on
Section
“WCC10G-
C/WCC10G-
D/WCC10GT-
D”,
p. 24-467
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Error Forwarding Rw { EPC | LSROFF LSROFF LSROFF
Mode }
ALS Mode Rw { NONE }
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE ENABLE Delay before turning laser off as an
protection modes.


Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 10GFC see
introductory
text on
Section
“WCC10G-
C/WCC10G-
D/WCC10GT-
D”,
p. 24-467
string string.
is operating.
direction.

nanometers..

Manual Auto-
Error Forwarding Rw { EPC | LSROFF LSROFF LSROFF
Mode }
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | DISABLE DISABLE Delay before turning laser off as an
protection modes.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Client Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Header Errors

Rx
OPR-HT -13.0 -1.0 -1.0


Client Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -10.0 0.5 0.5
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -11.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -11.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx

Client Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx Frames NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
PAUSE Frames NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Received
Rx CRC Errors NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Rx Bytes NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.


Client Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Header Errors
Rx
OPR-HT -13.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -10.0 0.5 0.5
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -11.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -11.0 -1.0 -1.0
Tx

Table 24-17: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Data Services Transponder Configuration - Client

Facility Conditions (All Types)
Condition

24.4 10GBE OTN Adaptation Configuration
This configuration is used to adapt a 10GBE client side signal into an
OTU2-like format called an OTU2LAN. The OTU2LAN signal format has the
same layout as a standard OTU2 signal, including the various layers mod-
elling in the OTN hierarchy as described in ITU-T Recommendation G.709,
but the signal rate is a proprietary one, since the standard OTU2 rate can-
not directly accommodate a 10GBE signal as a payload in an OPU2.
The 10GBE signal on the client side of the module has identical properties
to that of the Section 24.3 “Data Services Transponder Configuration”,
p. 24-475, as described in Section 24.3.2 “Client Facility Properties”,
p. 24-481.
of the OTU2LAN network facility type and the associated optional GCC0,
GCC0S, GCC1 and GCC2 DCN facility types supported in this configuration.

24.4.1 OTU2LAN Network Facility Properties

Table 24-18: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D 10GBE OTN Adaptation Configuration - OTU2LAN
Network Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OTU2LAN OTU2LAN

string string.
NA }
nanometers..
Error Forwarding Rw { AIS } AIS AIS
Mode
Band.
Stuffing RE {Y|N} Y Y
Correction EFEC-2 |
NOFEC }
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }

Manual Auto-
Termination Level Rw { OTU | OPU } OPU see comment Will always be OPU in this
configuration.
Highest R { Same as N/A N/A
Monitoring Level Termination
Level value. }
OTU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
Period
ODU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
Period
TCM-A BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
TCM-A SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
TCM-B BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
TCM-B SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
TCM-C BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
TCM-C SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
Expected string
Expected string
Expected string
Expected string
Expected string
Trace string
Trace string

Trace string


Manual Auto-
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string

Trace string

Manual Auto-
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA



Manual Auto-
direction.
not yet been assigned and
therefore the laser will be switched
off.

Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
OTU FEC SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
FEC Corrected NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Errors


Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
TCM-A ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-A SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-A BBE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-A UAS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-B ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-B SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-B BBE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-B UAS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-C ES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-C SES NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-C BBE NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
TCM-C UAS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.



Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -22.0 -8.0 -8.0
from
module.
from
module.
from
module.

Network Facility Conditions
Condition


Network Facility Conditions
Condition
TCM-C AIS NEND RCV NANA NR Yes SA
TCM-C OCI NEND RCV NANA NR Yes SA
TCM-C Locked NEND RCV NANA NR Yes SA
TCM-C Loss of TConn NEND RCV NANA MN Yes SA
TCM-C Signal Degrade NEND RCV NANA MJ Yes SA
TCM-C BDI FEND RCV NANA NR Yes NSA



Table 24-21: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D 10GBE OTN Adaptation Configuration - GCC0
Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.


Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 24-24: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D 10GBE OTN Adaptation Configuration - GCC0S

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
rate
ECC Protection R N N/A N/A Will always be N - this facility type
cannot exist if module protection is
configured.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA


Table 24-25: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D 10GBE OTN Adaptation Configuration -

GCC0/GCC0S/GCC1/GCC2 Facility Conditions
Condition

24.5 Transport Services Transponder Configuration

The WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D module Transport Services tran-
sponder configuration adapts a client side OC192 or STM64 broad spec-
trum optical signal into a like type CWDM or DWDM compatible optical
signal for transport.
The signal passing through the module may either be physically regener-
ated or the OC-192 Section/STM-64 Regenerator Section layer may be ter-
minated - if not terminated, non-intrusive monitoring of the layer is
performed. The OC-192 Line/STM-64 Multiplex Section layer is always
non-intrusively monitored. The degree of termination must be identical
on both the client and network facilities, and the system will enforce this
restriction by denying any attempts to configure the facilities contrary to
this rule. If the OC-192 Section/STM-64 Regenerator Section layer is ter-
minated, it is also possible to provision an associated SDCC DCN facility
on either or both of the client and network sides.

Table 24-26: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Transport Services Transponder Configuration -
OC192 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OC192 N/A
string string.
NA }
nanometers..
Mode
Band.
Termination Level Rw { SECTION | PHYS N/A The client and network facility
PHYS } values must match.
Highest R { LINE } N/A N/A The line layer will always be
Monitoring Level monitored to a limited degree.
Line BER Signal Rw {5|6|7|8| 6 N/A
Degrade 9}
Sec/RS Trace Rw 62 character Null string N/A
Expected string
string
Sec/RS Tx Trace Rw 62 character Null string N/A
string
Section TIM Mode Rw { DSBLD | DSBLD N/A
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Sec/RS Trace Rw { 1BYTE | 16CRC7 N/A
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }


OC192 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
ALS Mode Rw Network Side: { Network N/A
NONE | ALS } side:
ALS
Client Side:
{ SDH-ALS | Client side:
NONE } NONE
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
is operating.
direction.

STM64 Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE STM64 N/A
string string.
NA }

Manual Auto-
nanometers..
Mode
Band.
Termination Level Rw { SECTION | PHYS N/A The client and network facility
PHYS } values must match.
MS Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 30 N/A
Degrade
MS SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 N/A
Period
Sec/RS Trace Rw 62 character Null string N/A
Expected string
string
Sec/RS Tx Trace Rw 62 character Null string N/A
string
Section TIM Mode Rw { DSBLD | DSBLD N/A
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Sec/RS Trace Rw { 1BYTE | 16CRC7 N/A
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
ALS Mode Rw Network Side: { Network N/A
NONE | ALS } side:
ALS
Client Side:
{ SDH-ALS | Client side:
NONE } NONE


Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
is operating.
direction.

OC192/STM64 Network Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type


Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Rx
OPR-HT -22.0 -8.0 -8.0
from
module.
from
module.
from
module.

OC192/STM64 Network Facility Conditions
Condition

Loopback


Condition

tical to those supported on the network side. The attribute values for the
facilities themselves are identical to those on the network side with the
exception of an additional attribute (shown below) and that the Protec-
tion Role attribute is not supported, and for brevity will not be repeated
here - refer to Table 24-26, WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Transport Ser-
vices Transponder Configuration - OC192 Facility Attributes, p. 24-501 and
Table 24-27, WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Transport Services Transpon-
der Configuration - STM64 Facility Attributes, p. 24-502 for details. There
are, however, some attribute value differences in the areas of PMs and
Conditions for the client side facilities, as reflected in the tables below.

OC192/STM64 Client Facility Modified Attributes
Manual Auto-
Error Forwarding Rw { AIS | LSROFF AIS AIS
Mode }
NONE }

OC192/STM64 Client Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -13.0 -1.0 -1.0
Power Tx


Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Optical NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -10.0 0.5 -10.0
Power Rx
OPR-HT -10.0 0.5 0.5
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -11.0 -1.0 -1.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -11.0 -1.0 -1.0
Power Tx

OC192/STM64 Client Facility Conditions
Condition
Loopback


Condition
24.5.3 DCN Facility Properties

If the client and/or network facilities have the property TERM=SECTION,
it is possible to provision the optional SDCC facilities associated with
them. Their attributes are as follows:

SDCC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE SDCC N/A N/A
string string.
rate
ECC Protection R {Y|N} N/A N/A


SDCC Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

SDCC Facility Conditions
Condition

24.6 Transport Services OTN Adaptation Configuration
This configuration is used to adapt an OC192 or STM64 client side signal
to an OTU2 network side facility. The OC192 or STM64 is carried as the
client signal inside the OPU2 payload, and is mapped using the ITU-T Rec-
ommendation G.709 defined bit-synchronous mode, in which the OPU2
timing is derived from the client signal except in cases of client signal
failure, in which case the module provides its own local timing reference
for generating conditioning signals.
The OTU2 network facility has attributes identical to that of the OTU2LAN
facility described in Section 24.4.1 “OTU2LAN Network Facility Properties”,
p. 24-488, with the exception that the Facility Type attribute value will
be OTU2. Similarly, it is possible to provision an associated GCC0, GCC0S,
GCC1 or GCC2 DCN facility if desired, and if provisioned, the attributes will
be identical to those described in Section 24.4.2 “Network DCN Facility
Properties”, p. 24-496.
The OC192 or STM64 signal on the client side in this configuration have
identical properties to those defined in the Section 24.5 “Transport Ser-
vices Transponder Configuration”, p. 24-500, as described in Section
24.5.2 “Client Facility Properties”, p. 24-506. If the client side signals ter-
minate the OC192 Section/STM64 Regenerator Section layer, it is also
possible to provision an associated SDCC DCN facility on the client side -
this facility will have properties identical to that defined in Section
24.5.3 “DCN Facility Properties”, p. 24-509.

24.7 OTN Transponder Configuration

The WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D module OTN Transponder configu-
ration is used to adapt a client side OTU2 or OTU2LAN signal which is a
broad spectrum optical signal into a like type CWDM or DWDM compatible
optical signal for transport.
In this configuration, the TERM attribute of the facilities is set to OTU,
to cause termination of the OTU2 and to permit provisioning the termi-
nation of the TCMi layers, but not the ODU2 or the OPU2 layers. This be-
havior is consistent with the functions of an OTU2 regenerator. The ODU2
layer is, however, non-intrusively monitored (see Table 24-35 below) and
therefore the notification code values for the ODU2 layer standing condi-
tions will default to a setting of NR. The OPU2 layer is neither terminated
nor monitored, so none of the conditions associated with that layer will
be supported in this configuration. The ODU layer conditions whose no-
tification code values in this configuration differ from that in previous
summary tables are as shown in Table 24-36 below:
Table 24-35: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D OTN Transponder Configuration - OTU2/OTU2LAN

Modified Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Applies to network side facilities only:
Level value. }
Applies to client side facilities only:
Monitoring Level

Facility Conditions
Condition


Since there are 2 OTN facilities - one on the client side and one on the
network side - this configuration also permits provisioning of the option-
al GCC0, GCC0S, GCC1 or GCC2 DCN facilities associated with either or both
sides.
The OTU2 or OTU2LAN network facility has attributes identical to that of
the OTU2LAN facility described in Section 24.4.1 “OTU2LAN Network Facil-
ity Properties”, p. 24-488, with the exception that the Facility Type at-
tribute value for the OTU2 facility will be OTU2 and the changes described
above for the ODU and OPU layer conditions. Similarly, it is possible to
provision an associated GCC0, GCC0S, GCC1 or GCC2 DCN facility if desired,
and if provisioned, the attributes will be identical to those described in
Section 24.4.2 “Network DCN Facility Properties”, p. 24-496.
On the client side, the OTU2 or OTU2LAN facility will also have identical
attributes to these facility types on the network side, with these excep-
tions:
1. the client side does not support the Protection Role attribute,
2. the following client side attributes are modified as shown below:

Client Facility Modified Attributes
Manual Auto-
Mode }
Correction NOFEC }
3. the Auto Shutdown (ALS) condition is not supported.

It is possible to provision a GCC0, GCC0S, GCC1 or GCC2 DCN facility on the
client side as well, and if provisioned, the attributes will be identical to
those described in Section 24.4.2 “Network DCN Facility Properties”,
p. 24-496.

24.8 Dual Card Network Protected Transponder

Configuration
It is also possible to use two WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D modules
network side, but also the modules themselves. This configuration is only
possible if both of the modules to be operated as a protected pair have
their DEPLOY attribute set to the value GENERIC. General rules applicable
to this type of protection mechanism are described in section Section 1.4
“Dual-Card Protection Configurations”, p. 1-7. The Dual Card Network Pro-
tected Transponder configuration is an extension applicable to each of
the transponder configurations described above (i.e. to the Section 24.3
“Data Services Transponder Configuration”, p. 24-475, Section 24.4 “10GBE
OTN Adaptation Configuration”, p. 24-487, Section 24.5 “Transport Services
Transponder Configuration”, p. 24-500, Section 24.6 “Transport Services
OTN Adaptation Configuration”, p. 24-511, and Section 24.7 “OTN Tran-
sponder Configuration”, p. 24-512.
A single 1PM module is able to provide the necessary support for this con-
figuration, while one 2PM module is able to support 2 separate such con-
figurations. A diagram showing the cabling arrangements for the modules
for both the 1PM and 2PM module cases is shown in Figure 24-1, p. 24-
515.
the modules network facilities defining the roles of these facilities as ei-
ther the normally working or protection member. The provisioning of the
module equipment type and of the network side facility type on each of
the protection group members must be and remain the same - this rule is
verified and enforced by the system software.
tected configurations, namely:
• Corresponding facilities on the client ports of the paired modules
must be of the same type.
• Corresponding facilities on both the client and network ports of the
paired modules must have identical values for the following
attributes, depending upon their type:
• OC192 and STM64 facilities: TERM
• OTU2 facilities: TERM, STUFF, FEC, TCMA, TCMB, TCMC
• DCN facilities (e.g. SDCC, GCC0, GCC0S, GCC1, GCC2) may not be
provisioned on either the client or network side.
if TCMA≠DSBLD, or SDHT-TCMB and SDPER-TCMB if TCMB≠DSBLD, or
SDHT-TCMC and SDPER-TCMC if TCMC≠DSBLD for OTU2 facilities or
SDHT-L for OC192 facilities or SDHT-MS and SDPER-MS for STM64

facilities) should be consistent between the two facilities to avoid
possible protection switching oscillation conditions from arising.

To Client NE
From Client NE
To Client NE
From Client NE
Fig. 24-1: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Dual Card Network Protected Transponder

Configuration Cabling


In general, all of the properties supported by the various non-DCN facility

types described in the sections above apply with the same values, de-
faults and auto-provisioning behavior. Therefore, to avoid repetition,
only the specific properties which are added or modified in this configu-
ration relative to these previously stated values will be described in the
following sub-sections. Since this configuration adds the ability to pro-
vision a protection group, all of the properties of the protection group
will be defined in the relevant sub-section below.

Relative to the properties defined for the various types of network side
facilities in the preceding sections, there is one difference in network
side facility attribute values, no differences in the Performance Monitor-
ing register and threshold definitions, several changes to the properties
of the facility conditions and several additional conditions due to their
ability to be configured as a member of a protection group. For brevity,
only these changes are summarized in the tables below.
Table 24-38: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Dual Card Network Protected Transponder

Configuration - Network Facility Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-
group.

Configuration - 10GBE/10GFC Network Facility Modified Conditions
Condition

Configuration - OTU2/OTU2LAN Network Facility Modified Conditions
Condition
TCM-C AIS NEND RCV NANA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C OCI NEND RCV NANA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C Locked NEND RCV NANA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C Loss of TConn NEND RCV NANA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C Signal Degrade NEND RCV NANA MJ/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C TIM NEND RCV NA NEND Yes/No SA/NSAc
Auto Shutdown (OPU-AIS) NEND TRMT NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA


Configuration - OC192/STM64 Network Facility Modified Conditions
Condition

Configuration - Additional Network Facility Conditions
Condition
PROTNA NEND NA NA Yes

The client side facilities have no changes to their attributes due to the
network facility protection groups existence, aside from the behavioral
changes noted above.

Configuration - 10GBE/10GFC Client Facility Conditions
Condition
Auto Shutdown (EPC) NEND TRMT NA NR/NR Yes/No SA/NSA
Data Rate Not Supported NEND NA NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA

Configuration - OTU2/OTU2LAN Client Facility Modified Conditions
Condition



Configuration - OTU2/OTU2LAN Client Facility Modified Conditions
Condition

Configuration - OC192/STM64 Client Facility Modified Conditions
Condition

The support of a network protection group on the WCC10G-C/WCC10G-

D/WCC10GT-D module is unique to this configuration, and its attributes
are summarized in the table below. In this release, there are no Condi-

tions or Performance Monitoring related registers or thresholds associat-
ed with the protection group instance (although relevant conditions do
exist on the network facilities, as described above).
Table 24-46: WCC10G-C/WCC10G-D/WCC10GT-D Protected Configuration - FFP-CH Attributes
Manual Auto-
Protection RE { CARD } N/A
Mechanism
Type
100 | 200 | .. |
10000}
For facilities of type OC192 or STM64:
Maintenance RE { LINE | PHYS } LINE N/A
Switching
SD DISABLE }
For facilities of type OTU2 or OTU2LAN:
Maintenance RE { PHYS | SNC-N- SNC-N-PM N/A

Switching PM }
SD DISABLE }
For facilities of type 10GBE or 10GFC:
Maintenance RE { PHYS } PHYS N/A
Switching


Chapter 25
WCC2G7-1N/WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D
The WCC2G7-1N/WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D module is a bi-directional tran-
sponder which is optionally able to perform adaptation of SONET OC-48
or SDH STM-16 client signals into the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
OTU1 format as defined in the ITU-T Recommendation G.709. It may also
be used as a 1GBE transponder. In addition, it may be configured as part
of a protection group using a card protection mechanism to provide net-
work facility protection.
On the network side, the module supports a single port. The wavelength
and reach of the network port are determined by the variant of the mod-
ule which is equipped, with the WCC2G7-C modules containing integrated
CWDM compatible network interfaces with a very long reach, the WCC2G7-
D versions include integrated DWDM compatible network interfaces with
a regional reach, and the WCC2G7-1N version provides a single pluggable
interface whose wavelength and reach is determined by the variant of
plug which is equipped. In all CWDM and DWDM cases, the network facility
operates with automatic laser safety features.
On the network side of the WCC2G7-1N module, the single port supports
a bi-directional facility using an SFP-G type plug (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”,
p. 2-31) of RATE=2G5, an SFP-C type plug (Section 2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24)
of Rate=2G5, or an SFP-D type plug (Section 2.2 “SFP-D”, p. 2-26) of
Rate=2G5. These types of plugs support all of the possible facility types
which the network side port allows.
an SFP-G type plug (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31) of RATE=2G5 or CL, or
either an SFP-D type plug (Section 2.2 “SFP-D”, p. 2-26) or an SFP-C type
plug (Section 2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24) of Rate=2G5. These types of plugs sup-
port all of the possible facility types which the client side port allows.
FW7420 F7 Vol3 WCC2G7.fm

bles:
Table 25-1: WCC2G7-1N EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCC2G7-1N WCC2G7-1N
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCC-PC1N-2G7U
string equipment.
string
Mode
Scenario CLIENTP | its facilities may not be configured
THRU } as a member in any form of
protection group.

Table 25-1: WCC2G7-1N EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 25-2: WCC2G7-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCC2G7-C WCC2G7-C
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCC-PC-2G7U-V#Cxxxx where the
string equipment. value of Cxxxx is equal to the
Channel attribute value.
string

C1590 }

Table 25-2: WCC2G7-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Mode
protection group.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 25-3: WCC2G7-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCC2G7-D WCC2G7-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string

Table 25-3: WCC2G7-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCC-PC-2G7U-R#Dxx where the
string equipment. value of Dxx is equal to the Channel
attribute value.
string
DC1 .. DC9 | module capabilities of the network port.
DL1 .. DL9 }
Reach R { REG } N/A N/A This attribute refers to the
capabilities of the network port.
The equivalent property of the
client ports is not available as a
Mode
protection group.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 25-4: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type

Table 25-5: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D EQPT Conditions
Condition
Boot up NEND NA NA TC No
completed
Install FWP NEND NA NA TC No
completed
Equipment NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Mismatch
Equipment NEND NA NA CR Yes SA
Removed
Voltage out of NEND NA NA MN Yes NSA
Range

The type of network side plugs permitted on the WCC2G7-1N variant of
the module are SFP-C (Section 2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24), SFP-D (Section 2.2
“SFP-D”, p. 2-26) and SFP-G (Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31). If the Rate at-
tribute value ANY is provisioned, the behavior will be to allow any of the
SFPs listed below to be equipped without raising a mismatch condition.
An Data Rate Not Supported condition will be raised by the facility when-
ever the corresponding equipped plug type is unable to support that fa-
cility type but an equipment level mismatch condition does not exist. The
set of valid plug types permitted on the network ports are:
Table 25-6: WCC2G7-1N Network Side Supported Plugs and

Facilities
Equipment


Table 25-6: WCC2G7-1N Network Side Supported Plugs and
Facilities
Equipment
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx VLONG
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx ULONG
SFP-G CL G1310 INTRA

2.1 “SFP-C”, p. 2-24), SFP-D (Section 2.2 “SFP-D”, p. 2-26) and SFP-G
(Section 2.4 “SFP-G”, p. 2-31). If the Rate attribute value ANY is provi-
sioned, the behavior will be to allow any of the SFPs listed below to be
equipped without raising a mismatch condition. An Data Rate Not Sup-
ported condition will be raised by the facility whenever the corresponding
equipped plug type is unable to support that facility type but an equip-
ment level mismatch condition does not exist. The set of valid plug types
permitted on the client ports are:
Table 25-7: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Client Side
Supported Plugs and Facilities
Equipment
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx VLONG
SFP-D 2G5 Dxx ULONG
SFP-G CL G1310 INTRA

25.2 WCC2G7-1N/WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Supported

Facilities
The auto-provisioning behavior of the module will be for the network fa-
cility to be an OTU1, while the client facility type will depend upon the
setting of the SYS attribute SIGDEF: it will be OC48 if SIGDEF=SONET, oth-
erwise it will be STM16.
Table 25-8: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
MODE=TRANS C CH:STM16 State, Operations, N CH:STM16 State, Operations,
TERM=PHYS Physical, STM-16 RS, Physical, STM-16 RS,
STM-16 MS STM-16 MS, Protection
MODE=TRANS C CH:OC48 State, Operations, N CH:OC48 State, Operations,
TERM=PHYS Physical, OC48 Physical, OC48 Section,
Section, OC48 Line OC48 Line, Protection
MODE=TRANS C CH:1GBE State, Operations, N CH:1GBE State, Operations,
TERM=PHYS Physical Physical, Protection
MODE=TRANS C CH:STM16 State, Operations, N CH:OTU1 State, Operations,

TERM=PHYS (Client) Physical, STM-16 RS, Physical, OTU1, TCMi,
TERM=OPU (Network) STM-16 MS ODU1, OPU1, Protection
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S |
GCC1 | GCC2
MODE=TRANS C CH:OC48 State, Operations, N CH:OTU1 State, Operations,
TERM=PHYS (Client) Physical, OC48 Physical, OTU1, TCMi,
TERM=OPU (Network) Section, OC48 Line ODU1, OPU1, Protection
DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S |
GCC1 | GCC2
MODE=TRANS C CH:STM16 State, Operations, N CH:STM16 State, Operations,
TERM=SECTION Physical, STM-16 RS, Physical, STM-16 RS,
STM-16 MS STM-16 MS, Protection
MODE=TRANS C CH:OC48 State, Operations, N CH:OC48 State, Operations,
TERM=SECTION Physical, OC48 Physical, OC48 Section,
Section, OC48 Line OC48 Line, Protection
MODE=TRANS C CH:STM16 State, Operations, N CH:OTU1 State, Operations,
TERM=SECTION Physical, STM-16 RS, Physical, OTU1, TCMi,
(Client) STM-16 MS ODU1, OPU1, Protection
TERM=OPU (Network) DCN:SDCC State DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S |
GCC1 | GCC2

Table 25-8: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
MODE=TRANS C CH:OC48 State, Operations, N CH:OTU1 State, Operations,
TERM=SECTION Physical, OC48 Physical, OTU1, TCMi,
(Client) Section, OC48 Line ODU1, OPU1, Protection
TERM=OPU (Network) DCN:SDCC State DCN:GCC0 | State
GCC0S |
GCC1 | GCC2
MODE=TRANS C CH:OTU1 State, Operations, N CH:OTU1 State, Operations,
TERM=OTU Physical, OTU1, TCMi, Physical, OTU1, TCMi,
ODU1 ODU1, Protection
GCC1 | GCC0S |
GCC2 GCC1 | GCC2
MODE=TRANS C CH:1GBE State. Operations, N CH:1GBE State. Operations,
TERM=PHYS Physical Physical, Protection

25.3 SONET/SDH Transponder Configuration

The WCC2G7-1N/WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D module SONET/SDH Transponder
configuration is used to perform bi-directional regeneration of a SONET
OC-48 or an SDH STM-16 signal between a client side broad spectrum op-
tical signal and a broad spectrum (on the WCC2G7-1N only), CWDM or
DWDM compatible network side optical signal. No on-board protection
switching capabilities are supported in this configuration - if network
channel protection services are required, the configuration described in
Section 25.7 “Dual Card Network Protected Transponder Configuration”,
p. 25-585 should be used instead.

Table 25-9: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D SONET/SDH Transponder Configuration - OC48
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OC48 See
description
in
introductory
text of
section on
Section
“WCC2G7-
1N/WCC2G7-
C/WCC2G7-
D”,
p. 25-523.
string string.
NA }
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
Termination Level RE { SECTION | PHYS see comment The client and network facility
PHYS } values must match. If the second
instance auto-provisions, the value
will match that of the first. When
the first facility auto-provisions it
will use the value PHYS. When the
second facility auto-provisions it
will use the same value as the
facility previously provisioned.



Manual Auto-
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE } ALS ALS If a CWDM, Grey or DWDM C-Band
the default.
Degrade 9}
Expected string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
string

Table 25-10: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D SONET/SDH Transponder Configuration - STM16
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE STM16 See
description
in
introductory
text of
section on
Section
“WCC2G7-
1N/WCC2G7-
C/WCC2G7-
D”,
p. 25-523.
string string.
NA }
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode


Manual Auto-
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE } ALS ALS If a CWDM, Grey or DWDM C-Band
the default.
MS Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 30 30
Degrade
MS SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
Expected string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
string

Table 25-11: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D SONET/SDH Transponder Configuration -
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
For Network Facilities on WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D modules only:
Power Rx
OPR-HT -30.0 -10.0 -10.0
For WCC2G7-1N Network Facilities only:
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx


Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Optical NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -19.0 -3.0 -27.0 if below 622
Power Rx Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx

Condition


Client Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
description
in
introductory
text of
section on
Section
“WCC2G7-
1N/WCC2G7-
C/WCC2G7-
D”,
p. 25-523.
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode }

Manual Auto-
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | SDH- see comment see comment If the equipment DEPLOY attribute
ALS | NONE } is not equal to THRU, the values
SDH-ALS and NONE are supported
and NONE is the default value. If the
equipment DEPLOY attribute is equal
to THRU and the supporting plug is
a CWDM, Grey or DWDM C-Band type,
then both values are supported and
ALS is the default, while if a DWDM
L-Band plug is used, only ALS is
valid and is the default. Otherwise,
only the value NONE is valid and
there is no default value.
Degrade 9}
Expected string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
string


Manual Auto-
description
in
introductory
text of
section on
Section
“WCC2G7-
1N/WCC2G7-
C/WCC2G7-
D”,
p. 25-523.
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode }

Manual Auto-
MS Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 30 30
Degrade
MS SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
Expected string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
string


Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx

Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx

Condition



Condition

If the client and/or network facilities have the property TERM=SECTION,
it is possible to provision the optional SDCC facilities associated with
them. Their attributes are as follows:
Table 25-17: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D SONET/SDH Transponder Configuration - SDCC
Facility Attributes
Auto-
Access Allowed provisioning
Attribute Name Type Values ENT Default Default Comments
FACTYPE RE SDCC N/A
ALIAS RW String (64) <null string> N/A
VSTIMER R 00-00 .. 96-00 N/A N/A If created with an initial state of
AINS, the value will be set to the
MAXRATE R 192 N/A N/A

PROTECT R N N/A N/A

Facility Attributes
Auto-
Access Allowed provisioning
Attribute Name Type Values ENT Default Default Comments
State RW IS | OOS | AINS AINS | MGT AINS | MGT If the SYS attribute AISPENA is set,
| MT | DSBLD AINS will be used as the default
both cases.
The mappings to target states in the
• IS to IS-NR
• OOS to OOS-MA

Facility Conditions
Condition
OOSAINS NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
OOSMGT NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
OOSMT NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
OOSDSBLD NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA

25.4 OTN Adaptation Transponder Configuration

The WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D module is able to map a SONET OC-
48 or an SDH STM-16 client side broad spectrum optical signal into an OTN
OTU1 CWDM or DWDM compatible network side optical signal. No on-board
protection switching capabilities are supported in this configuration - if
network channel protection services are required, the configuration de-
scribed in Section 25.7 “Dual Card Network Protected Transponder Configu-
ration”, p. 25-585 should be used instead.
When configured as an OTN adaptation transponder, the client side SONET
or SDH signal is mapped into the OPU1 payload of the ODU1 signal trans-
ported by the OTU1. The mapping operates in the G.709 defined bit-syn-
chronous mode, in which the OPU1 timing is normally derived from the
client signal except in cases of client signal failure, in which case the
module provides its own local timing reference for generating condition-
ing signals.
Since this configuration represents the point at which the client signal
within the OTU1 is inserted and removed, all of the layers of the OTU1
signal are always terminated, including the ODU1, TCMi and OPU1 over-
head. In the case of the client signal, however, it is user-provisionable as
to whether the signal will only be terminated at the physical layer or
whether section layer termination will be performed. If section layer ter-
mination is selected, it is then possible to provision the SDCC facility as-
sociated with the client signal as well. Access is always provided to both
the section and line layer information of the client signal - if it is not
terminated, the associated information is non-intrusively monitored and
made accessible. When a layer is non-intrusively monitored, the associ-
ated conditions are by default adjusted so that they have a NTFCNCDE val-
ue of NR to avoid spurious autonomous reporting of conditions along a
network trail. An exception to this rule are the LOF-S and associated Auto
Shutdown (L-AIS) conditions which are supported whether the Section
layer is terminated or not.


Table 25-19: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Adaptation Configuration - OTU1 Network
Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OTU1 OTU1 See description in introductory text
of section on Section “WCC2G7-
1N/WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D”,
p. 25-523.
string string.
NA }
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode
Correction NOFEC }
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }


Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
TCM2 |
TCM3 |
TCM4 |
TCM5 |
TCM6 |
DSBLD }
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE } see comment see comment If a DWDM C-Band plug is used,
ALS is the default, otherwise only
ALS is valid and is the default.
Termination Level RE { OPU | OTU } OPU see comment In this configuration, the value
must be OPU.
Level value. }
OTU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
Period
ODU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
Period
SDHT-TCMA Rw 1 .. 100 15 15
SDPER-TCMA Rw 2 .. 10 7 7
SDHT-TCMB Rw 1 .. 100 15 15
SDPER-TCMB Rw 2 .. 10 7 7
SDHT-TCMC Rw 1 .. 100 15 15
SDPER-TCMC Rw 2 .. 10 7 7
Expected string
Expected string
Expected string
Expected string
Expected string
Trace string

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string

Trace string


Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Mode ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location

Type and
FEC Corrected NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Errors



Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Type and
For WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Network Facilities Only:
Rx
OPR-HT -30.0 -10.0 -10.0
Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx

Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Type and
Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx
Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Tx
Optical Power NEND RCV NA Decimal 1 OPR-LT -19.0 -3.0 -27.0 if below 622
Rx Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Tx

Facility Conditions
Condition



Facility Conditions
Condition
TCM-A TIM NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA/NSA
TCM-B TIM NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA/NSA
TCM-C AIS NEND RCV NANA NR Yes SA
TCM-C OCI NEND RCV NANA NR Yes SA
TCM-C Locked NEND RCV NANA NR Yes SA
TCM-C Loss of TConn NEND RCV NANA MN Yes SA
TCM-C Signal Degrade NEND RCV NANA MJ Yes SA
TCM-C BDI FEND RCV NANA NR Yes NSA
TCM-C TIM NEND RCV NA MN Yes SA/NSA


Facility Conditions
Condition
Sec/RS LOFa NEND RCV NA CR Yes SA

For Network Facilities on WCC2G7-1N modules only:
a. This property will be supported whether the facility is provisioned to terminate the section layer or only the physical
layer.


Table 25-22: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Adaptation Configuration - GCC0 Facility
Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
cannot exist if card protection is
configured.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.


Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 25-25: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Adaptation Configuration - GCC0S Facility

Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configured.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA


Table 25-26: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Adaptation Configuration -

Condition

Table 25-27: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Adaptation Configuration - OC48 Client
Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
description
in
introductory
text of
section on
Section
“WCC2G7-
1N/WCC2G7-
C/WCC2G7-
D”,
p. 25-523.
string string.
is operating.
direction.

nanometers..


Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Mode }
Termination Level RE { SECTION | PHYS see comment
PHYS }
Degrade 9}
Expected string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
string
Table 25-28: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Adaptation Configuration - STM16 Client

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
description in
introductory
text of
section on
Section
“WCC2G7-
1N/WCC2G7-
C/WCC2G7-D”,
p. 25-523.
string string.
direction.
nanometers..
Mode }
Termination Level RE { SECTION | PHYS see comment
PHYS }

Table 25-28: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Adaptation Configuration - STM16 Client

Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
and NONE is the default value. If
the equipment DEPLOY attribute is
equal to THRU and the supporting
plug is a CWDM, Grey or DWDM C-
Band type, then both values are
while if a DWDM L-Band plug is
used, only ALS is valid and is the
default. Otherwise, only the value
NONE is valid and there is no
default value.
MS Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 30 30
Degrade
MS SD Integer. Rw { 2 .. 10 } 7 7
Period
Expected string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
Length 16CRC7 |
64CRLF }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
string

Table 25-29: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Adaptation Configuration - OC48/STM16
Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Type and
Line/MS NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
UAS
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx


Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location

Type and
Power Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx

Client Facility Conditions
Condition


Client Facility Conditions
Condition

The associated SDCC facility may be provisioned if the client facility TERM
attribute has the value SECTION. In this case, the attributes of the SDCC
facility are as follows:
Table 25-31: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Adaptation Configuration - SDCC Facility
Attributes
Auto-
Access provisioning
Attribute Name Type Allowed Values ENT Default Default Comments
FACTYPE RE SDCC N/A
ALIAS RW String (64) <null string> N/A
VSTIMER R 00-00 .. 96-00 see comment see comment If created with an initial state of
AINS, the value will be set to the
MAXRATE R 192 N/A N/A

PROTECT R N N/A N/A


Attributes
Auto-
Access provisioning
Attribute Name Type Allowed Values ENT Default Default Comments
State RW IS | OOS | AINS AINS | MGT AINS | MGT If the SYS attribute AISPENA is set,
| MT | DSBLD AINS will be used as the default
both cases.
The mappings to target states in the
• IS to IS-NR
• OOS to OOS-MA
SDCC facilities do not support any PM registers in this release.

Conditions
Condition
OOSAINS NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
OOSMGT NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
OOSMT NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA
OOSDSBLD NEND NA NA NA Yes NSA

25.5 OTN Transponder Configuration
The WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D module is able to operate as an
OTU1 transponder converting a client side broad spectrum optical signal
into a broad spectrum (on the WCC2G7-1N only), CWDM or DWDM compat-
ible network side optical signal. No on-board protection switching capa-
bilities are supported in this configuration - if network channel
protection services are required, the configuration described in Section
25.7 “Dual Card Network Protected Transponder Configuration”, p. 25-585
should be used instead.
When configured as an OTN transponder, the timing is normally derived
from the client signal except in cases of client signal failure, in which
case the module provides its own local timing reference for generating
conditioning signals.
The ODU1 layer is monitored, but no visibility is provided to the OPU1 lay-
er. The ODU1 layer associated conditions are adjusted so that they have
a NTFCNCDE value of NR to avoid spurious autonomous reporting of con-
ditions along a network trail.
of the facility types supported in this configuration.

25.5.1 Client and Network Facility Properties

Table 25-33: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Transponder Configuration - OTU1 Facility
Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE OTU1 see comment See description in introductory text
p. 25-523.
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Correction NOFEC }
TCM-A Activation Rw DSBLD DSBLD DSBLD
TCM-B Activation Rw DSBLD DSBLD DSBLD
TCM-C Activation Rw DSBLD DSBLD DSBLD
Termination Level RE { OPU | OTU } see comment see comment The client and network facility
values must both be OTU. The
second facility entered will
automatically use the same value as
the previously provisioned facility
when it is entered.
OTU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
Period
ODU BBE Signal Rw { 1 .. 100 } 15 15
Degrade
Period

Expected string

Attributes
Manual Auto-
Expected string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
Trace string
string
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }
ENBLD-
AISDSBLD }


Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
For Network Side Facilities only:
NA }
Mode
Level value. }
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE } see comment see comment If a DWDM C-Band plug is used,
ALS is the default, otherwise only
ALS is valid and is the default.
For Client Side Facilities only:
Mode }
Monitoring Level
ALS Mode Rw { ALS | NONE } see comment see comment If supporting plug is CWDM, Grey or
DWDM C-Band type, then both
values are supported and ALS is the
default. If a DWDM L-Band plug is
NONE is valid and there is no default
value.

PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Type and
FEC NEND RCV 15-MIN Integer No thresholds defined.
Corrected
Errors
Power Rx
OPR-HT -30.0 -10.0 -10.0
For Client Facilities and WCC2G7-1N Network Facilities only:


PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location

Type and
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx

PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Type and
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx

Conditions
Condition
Loopback



Conditions
Condition
For Network Facilities on WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Modules Only:
For Client Facilities and WCC2G7-1N Network Facilities Only

Table 25-36: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Transponder Configuration - GCC0 Facility
Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configured.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.


Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configuration.

Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 25-39: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Transponder Configuration - GCC0S Facility

Attributes
Manual Auto-
string string.
rate
configured.
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA


Table 25-40: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D OTN Transponder Configuration -

Condition

25.6 1GBE Transponder Configuration
The WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D module is able to operate as a
1GBE transponder converting a client side broad spectrum optical signal
into a broad spectrum (on the WCC2G7-1N only), CWDM or DWDM compat-
ible network side optical signal. No on-board protection switching capa-
bilities are supported in this configuration - if network channel
protection services are required, the configuration described in Section
25.7 “Dual Card Network Protected Transponder Configuration”, p. 25-585
should be used instead.
When configured as a 1GBE transponder, the timing is normally derived
from the client signal except in cases of client signal failure, in which
case the module provides its own local timing reference for generating
conditioning signals.
of the facility types supported in this configuration.

25.6.1 Client and Network Facility Properties

Table 25-41: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D 1GBE Transponder Configuration - 1GBE Facility
Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 1GBE see comment See description in introductory text
p. 25-523.
string string.
is operating.
direction.
nanometers..
Termination Level RE { PHYS } PHYS N/A
Highest R { PHYS } N/A N/A
Monitoring Level
Laser-Off Delay Rw { ENABLE | ENABLE N/A
DISABLE }
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
| NA }
Error Forwarding Rw { EPC } EPC N/A
Mode

Attributes
Manual Auto-
For Network Side Facilities on WCC2G7-C module only:
ALS Mode R { NONE | ALS } N/A N/A
For Network Side Facilities not on WCC2G7-C module:
Band.
Error Forwarding Rw { LSROFF } LSROFF N/A
Mode
ALS Mode Rw { NONE | ALS } see comment N/A If supporting plug is CWDM, Grey or
DWDM C-Band type, then both
values are supported and ALS is the
default. If a DWDM L-Band plug is
NONE is valid and there is no default
value.

PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -30.0 -10.0 -10.0
For Client Facilities and WCC2G7-1N Network Facilities only:
Power Rx
OPR-HT -20.0 0 0
Power Tx


PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -16.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -27.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx Mbps
-19.0 otherwise
OPR-HT -19.0 -3.0 -3.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx
Power Rx
OPR-HT -28.0 -9.0 -9.0
Power Tx

Conditions
Condition
For Network Facilities on WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Modules Only:
For Client Facilities and WCC2G7-1N Network Facilities Only
25.7 Dual Card Network Protected Transponder

Configuration
It is also possible to use two WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D modules
network side, but also the modules themselves. This configuration is only
possible if both of the modules to be operated as a protected pair have
their Deployment Scenario attribute set to the value GENERIC. General
rules applicable to this type of protection mechanism are described in
Section 1.4 “Dual-Card Protection Configurations”, p. 1-7.

A single 1PM module is able to provide the necessary support for this con-
figuration, while one 2PM module is able to support 2 separate such con-
figurations. A diagram showing the cabling arrangements for the modules
for both the 1PM and 2PM module cases is shown in Figure 25-1, p. 25-
586.
To Client NE
From Client NE
To Client NE
From Client NE
Fig. 25-1: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Dual Card Network Protected Configuration Cabling

the network facilities defining the roles of these facilities as either the
normally working or protection member. The provisioning of the module

equipment type and of the network side facility type on each of the pro-
tection group members must be and remain the same - this rule is verified
and enforced by the system software.
tected configurations, namely:
• Corresponding facilities on the client ports of the paired modules
must be of the same type.
• Corresponding facilities on both the client and network ports of the
paired modules must have identical values for the following
attributes, depending upon their type:
• OC48 and STM16 facilities: TERM, MON
• OTU1 facilities: TERM, MON, FEC, TCMA, TCMB, TCMC
• SDCC facilities may not be provisioned on either the client or
network side.
• GCC0, GCC0S, GCC1 and GCC2 facilities may not be provisioned on
either the client or network side.
if TCMA≠DSBLD, or SDHT-TCMB and SDPER-TCMB if TCMB≠DSBLD for
OTU1 facilities or SDHT-L for OC48 facilities or SDHT-MS and SDPER-
MS for STM16 facilities) should be consistent between the two
facilities to avoid possible protection switching oscillation
conditions from arising.
In general, all of the properties supported by the various non-DCN facility
types described in the sections above apply with the same values, de-
faults and auto-provisioning behavior. Therefore, to avoid repetition,
only the specific properties which are added or modified in this configu-
ration relative to these previously stated values will be described in the
following sub-sections. Since this configuration adds the ability to pro-
vision a protection group, all of the properties of the protection group
will be defined in the relevant sub-section below.

erties”, p. 25-533 and Section 25.4.1 “Network Facility Properties”,
p. 25-549 there is one difference in network side facility attribute values,
no differences in the Performance Monitoring register and threshold def-
initions, several changes to the properties of the facility conditions and
several additional conditions due to their ability to be configured as a

member of a protection group, as indicated in the tables below.

The client side facilities have no changes to their attributes due to the
network facility protection groups existence, aside from the behavioral
changes noted above related to the requirement that some attributes pos-
sess the same value on the facilities on each of the paired modules within
the protection group.
Table 25-44: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Protected Transponder Configuration - Network

Facility Attribute Changes
Manual Auto-
group.
Table 25-45: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Protected Transponder Configuration -

OC48/STM16 Network Facility Modified Conditions
Condition Location Direction Time Condition Severity may Effect Upon
Interval Type/Alarm be set Service
Severity
Table 25-46: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Protected Transponder Configuration - OTU1

Network Facility Modified Conditions
Condition


Condition
TCM-A TIM NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-B TIM NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
TCM-C TIM NEND RCV NA MN/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
Auto Shutdown (OPU-AIS) NEND TRMT NA NR Yes SA/NSA
Sec/RS LOFa NEND RCV NA CR/MN Yes/No SA/NSA
a. This property will be supported whether the facility is provisioned to terminate the section layer or only the physical
layer.

Table 25-47: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Protected Transponder Configuration - 1GBE

Condition

Additional Network Facility Conditions
Condition
PROTNA NEND NA NA Yes

signal independently, several of the supported conditions on these facil-
ities have their behavior modified due to the effects of the protection
configuration, as follows:

OC48/STM16 Client Facility Modified Conditions
Condition

OC48/STM16 Client Facility Modified Conditions
Condition

Client Facility Modified Conditions
Condition

Table 25-51: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Protected Transponder Configuration - 1GBE

Client Facility Modified Conditions
Condition

The support of a network protection group on the WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-
C/WCC2G7-D module is unique to this configuration, and its attributes are
summarized in the table below. In this release, there are no Conditions
or Performance Monitoring related registers or thresholds associated with
the protection group instance (although relevant conditions do exist on
the network facilities, as described above).
Table 25-52: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Protected Configuration - FFP-CH Attributes
Manual Auto-
Protection RE { CARD } N/A
Mechanism
Type
100 | 200 | ..
| 10000}
If facility type is OC48 or STM16:
Maintenance RE { LINE | PHYS LINE N/A
Switching }

Table 25-52: WCC2G7-1N/ WCC2G7-C/WCC2G7-D Protected Configuration - FFP-CH Attributes
Manual Auto-
If facility type is OTU1:
Maintenance RE { PHYS | SNC- SNC-N-PM N/A
Switching N-PM }
If facility type is 1GBE:
Maintenance RE { PHYS } PHYS N/A
Switching
Only if Maintenance Switching is not set to PHYS:
SD DISABLE }


Chapter 26
WCELS-C/WCELS-D
The WCELS-C/WCELS-D module is a dynamically rate-adaptive transponder
supporting a single client and network facility pair. It is able to perform
a simple bi-directional 2R (re-shaping and regeneration) function for sig-
nals operating at rates between 8 Mbps and 200 Mbps. This allows the
module to provide a bit-transparent transponder service for Sysplex Tim-
er, ESCON, Fast Ethernet, FDDI, FE, STM-1, OC-3, and 155 Mbps ATM sig-
nals. The module supports the requirements for IBMs Geographically
Dispersed Parallel Sysplex (GDPS) architecture and therefore requires the
NCU/NCU2E to be of that grade - if the NCU/NCU2E is not a GDPS grade
module, this module will not provision, or if already provisioned, will
cease to function if the NCU/NCU2E is exchanged for a non-GDPS grade
variant.
termined by the variant of the module which is equipped. The WCELS-C
modules contain a CWDM single-mode fiber compatible network interface
with a ULONG reach, while the WCELS-D versions include a DWDM single-
mode fiber compatible network interface with a ULONG reach. All variants
of the module perform automatic laser safety shutdown operations on the
network port when the receive signal is lost.
The client side supports a single bi-directional facility using an integrat-
ed multi-mode optical interface. The transmit port operates within the
range of 1260 to 1360 nm. at a launch power of -21 to -16 dBm, while
the receiver accepts signals within the range of 1260 to 1580 nm. with
input powers between -28 to -5 dBm. The maximum reach which may be
obtained with the client ports is roughly 0.5 Km. when using 62.5 µm
core multi-mode fiber or 5 Km. when using 9 µm core single-mode fiber.
The facility types on both ports are identical, and are limited to the 2R
facility type. Since the module does not employ any pluggable sub-mod-
ules, both the client and network facilities will auto-provision together
whenever auto-provisioning of the module occurs.
FW7420 F7 Vol3 WCELS.fm

bles:
Table 26-1: WCELS-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCELS-C WCELS-C
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCE-LS-T-V#Cxxxx where Cxxxx is
attribute.
string
C1530 | C1550 | be used.
C1570 | C1590 |
C1610 }
Reach R { ULONG } N/A N/A
Mode

Table 26-1: WCELS-C EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 26-2: WCELS-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Equipment Type RE WCELS-D WCELS-D
string
string string.
Revision string
string
Revision string
string
string
string
Official Name R 32 character This value is read from the WCE-LS-T-V#Dxx where Dxx is equal
string equipment. to the value of the Channel
attribute.
string

DC1 .. DC9 | matching the inserted module will
DL1 .. DL9 } be used.

Table 26-2: WCELS-D EQPT Attributes
Manual Auto-
Reach R { ULONG } N/A N/A
Mode
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA
Table 26-3: WCELS-C/WCELS-D EQPT Performance Monitoring
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Table 26-4: WCELS-C/WCELS-D EQPT Conditions
Condition


Table 26-4: WCELS-C/WCELS-D EQPT Conditions
Condition

26.2 WCELS-C/WCELS-D Supported Facilities

Table 26-5: WCELS-C/WCELS-D Supported Facility Configurations
Client Network
Port(s)
Port(s)
Facilit Facilit
Attribute Dependencies y Type Supported Layers y Type Supported Layers
C CH:2R State, Operations, N CH:2R State, Operations,
Physical Physical

The WCELS-C/WCELS-D module Transponder configuration is used to adapt
a client side broad spectrum optical signal into like type CWDM or DWDM
compatible optical signal for transport. No protection switching capabil-
ities are supported for this module.
of the 2R facility type supported in this configuration.
26.3.1 Facility Properties

Table 26-6: WCELS-C/WCELS-D Transponder Configuration - 2R Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Facility Type RE 2R 2R
string string.
for network is operating.
side Equal to the assigned channel
G1310 for supporting the facilities transmit
client side direction.

for network number in use by the facilities
side transmit direction, expressed in
nanometers..
1310.00 for
client side
Mode
are:
• IS to IS-NR
• MGT to OOS-MA

Table 26-6: WCELS-C/WCELS-D Transponder Configuration - 2R Facility Attributes
Manual Auto-
Table 26-7: WCELS-C/WCELS-D Transponder Configuration - 2R Facility PMs
Threshold
Time Interval
Direction
Location
Threshold Level
Register Type
Seconds
For WCELS-D Modules Network Port Only:
from
module.
Laser TEMP NEND TRMT NA Decimal 1 LSRTEMP-FHT N/A N/A
Table 26-8: WCELS-C/WCELS-D Transponder Configuration - 2R Facility Conditions
Condition
For Network Facility Only:
Auto Shutdown (ALS)a NEND TRMT NA NR Yes SA

For WCELS-D Module Network Facility Only:


Table 26-8: WCELS-C/WCELS-D Transponder Configuration - 2R Facility Conditions
Condition
For Client Facility Only:
a. Note that Auto Shutdown (ALS) will occur in cases where the network side shuts down due to a client signal failure,
since when this occurs it will result in ALS operation as a side-effect. Therefore, the Auto Shutdown (OFF) condition on the
network side will not be visible, as it is masked by the effects of ALS operation.

Entity Properties and Parameters 7 1 5

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Entity Properties and Parameters 7 1 5

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fiber Service Platform 3000R7

Entity Properties and

ADVA AG Optical Networking

Fax: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 199

ii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

Document Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix

Chapter 1 General Provisioning Behavior

Chapter 2 Provisioning Pluggable Modules

Chapter 3 Filter Modules

4.4.2 Network EOC Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

iv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

8.3.5 Client DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Document Version 7.1.5 v

8.4.4 Client Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Chapter 12 Dispersion Compensation Modules

12.2 DCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

vi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Chapter 13 Erbium Doped Fiber Amplifiers

Chapter 17 Protection Modules

Chapter 18 Power Supply Units

18.1 PSU7HU-AC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

Document Version 7.1.5 vii

Chapter 19 Switch Modules

23.1.2 Plug Attributes - Network Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440

viii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

23.3.2 Client Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454

25.5.2 DCN Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Document Version 7.1.5 ix

25.7.2 Client Facility Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591

x FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Purpose and Scope

Describes the purpose, audience, organization and the conventions, that

Chapter 1 “General Provisioning Behavior”

This chapter contains information on provisioning related behavior which

xii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Safety Symbols and Message Conventions

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to a

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the

Document Version 7.1.5 xiii

A symbol that draws attention to the necessity and importance of

This symbol accompanies any instruction that draws attention to the

A symbol that draws attention to supplemental information and helpful

xiv FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Document Version 7.1.5 xv

You can e-mail your comments/suggestions to:

To submit your comments/suggestions by mail, use the following address:

ADVA AG Optical Networking

We appreciate and value your comments/suggestions to improve the

Obtaining Technical Assistance

xvi FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

E-mail questions regarding the partner login to:

and select the “Support” button.

To contact ADVA by E-mail, use one of the following addresses:

Europe, Middle East, Africa: Support@advaoptical.com

Document Version 7.1.5 xvii

ADVA AG Optical Networking Tel: +49 (0)89 89 06 65 0

ADVA Optical Networking Inc. Tel: +1 201 258 8300

ADVA Optical Networking Corp. Tel: +81 (0)3 5408 5891

xviii FSP 3000R7 Rel.7.1.5 Entity Properties and Parameters

Chapter 15, p. 15-345

This page intentionally left blank